TCXDVN 356-2005 Design of Concrete and RC Structures PDF

TCXDVN 356: 2005
First Edition
CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES – DESIGN STANDARD
1 Scope of application
1.1 This standard shall replace the standard TCVN 5574:1991.

1.2 This standard is used in designing the concrete and reinforced concrete structures of
buildings and constructions with different functions, working under the systemmatrical
impact of the temperature not over +50°C, and neither is below -70°C.
1.3 This standard specifies the requirements regarding the design of concrete and
reinforced concrete structures made from heavy, light concrete, small stone concrete,
honey cell concrete, hollow concrete, as well as automatic stress concrete.
1.4 The requirements specified in this standard shall not apply for concrete and reinforced
concrete structures for public water constructions, bridges, traffic tunnel, underground
pipeline, motorway surface and airport roads; steel mesh cements with average
quantity that is less tahn 500 kg/m3 and more than 2500 kg/m3, polymer, lime – cinder
adhesives and synthosized adhesive (except that it is used for honey cell concrete),
plaster adhesive and special adhesive substance, concrete using special organic steel
material, with big emptiness in the structure.
1.5 In designing the concrete and reinforced concrete working in special conditions
(earthquake impact, strongly eroded environment, high moisture conditions etc.) shall
comply with the supplement requirements for the structures of the corresponding
standards.
2 Extracted standards
This standard shall be used at the same time, and extracts some the following
standards :
 TCVN 4612 : 1988 Construction design document system. Concrete reinforced
structures. Conventional symbols and drawings;
 TCVN 5572 : 1991 Construction design document system. Concrete Reinforced
structures. Construction drawing.
 TCVN 6048 : 1995 Construction and building drawings. Symbols of concrete
reinforced;
3
TCXDVN 356: 2005
 TCVN 5898 : 1995 Construction drawing and civil construction. Steel rod
statistics list;
 TCVN 3118 : 1993 Heavy concrete. Compressive strength defining method.
 TCVN 1651 : 1985 Hot rolled concrete reinforcement steel
 TCVN 3101 : 1979 Cold low carbonated steel rope used for making concrete
reinforcement.
 TCVN 3100 : 1979 Round steel rope used for making front stress concrete
reinforcement.
 TCVN 6284 : 1997 Prestressed concrete reinforced steel (section 1-5)
 TCVN 2737 : 1995 Load and impact. Designing standard;
 TCXD 327 : 2004 Anti-corrosion requirements in coastal environment.
TCVN 197 : 1985 Metal. Strain testing method;
 TCXD 227 : 1999 Reinforced steel in concrete. Arc welding;
 TCVN 3223 : 1994 Electric welding rod used for carbonated steel and low alloy
steel;
steel. Testing method;
 TCVN 1691 : 1975 Manual electric arc welding knots;
steel. Testing method.
3 Terminology, measurement unit and symbols
3.1 Terminology
.This standard uses some material features “compressive concrete durability degree -
and “strain concrete durability degree - replaced equivalently with - concrete symbol
subject to compressive strength - and - concrete symbol subject to the strain strength -
used in TCVN 5574 : 1991.
The compressive concrete durability degree : symbolized by B, is the estimated
average value of the temporary compressive strength measured by MPa, with assured
probability not less than 95%, defined on standard dimension cubic samples (150 mm
x 150 mm x 150 mm) which is produced and cared in standard condition and
compression tested at the day of 28.
4
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Strain concrete durability degree : symbolized by B, is the estimated average value of
the temporary compressive strength measured by MPa, with assured probability not
less than 95%, defined on standard samples which is produced and cared in standard
condition and strain tested at the day of 28.
The concrete symbol subject to compressive strength : symbolized by M, is the
concrete strength, taken equally with the estimated average value of the temporary
compressive strength, measured by daN/cm2 which is defined on standard dimension
cubic samples (150 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm) produced and cared in standard
condition and compression tested at the day of 28.
The concrete symbol subject to the strain strength symbolized by K, is the concrete
strength, taken equally with the estimated average value of the temporary strain
strength, measured by daN/cm2 which is defined on standard strain samples produced
and cared in standard condition and strain tested at the day of 28.
The correlation between The compressive concrete durability degree and the concrete
symbol subject to compressive strength. See the appendix A.
Concrete structures : is the structure made from non-steel reinforced concrete or steel
reinforcement subject to the composition requirements not mentioned in calculation.
The calculated interior forces for all the impacts of concrete structures are supported
by the concrete.
Concrete reinforced structures : is the structures made from concrete with built-in
strength reinforcing steel and composition steel. The calculated interior forces for all
the impacts of the concrete reinforced structures are supported by the concrete and
strength reinforced steel.
Strength reinforced steel : is the reinforcement placed subject to the calculation.
Composition reinforced steel : is the reinforcement placed subject to the composition
requirement that is not calculated.
Strain reinforced steel : is the reinforcement under front stress during the process of
front structure production when the used load impacts on.
The working height of section : is the distance from the compressive edge of the
structures to the section center of the strain longitudinal reinforced steel.
Protection concrete : is the concrete layer with its thickness from the structure edge to
the nearest surface of the reinforced member.
Critical force : is the biggest interir force that its structures, sections (with selected
material features) could support.
5
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Limited state : is the state that when the structure exceeds, it will no longer satisfy the
usage requirements for it made in designing.
Normal using condition : is the using condition with regard to the requirements
estimated beforehand subject to the standard or in the design.
3.2 Measurement unit

In this standard, the SI measurement unit is applied. Length : m; stress : Mpa; force : N
(unit exchange table in appendix G)
3.3 Symbols and parameters
3.3.1 Geometric features

b width of square section; width of I- and T-section ribs;
b f , b′f width of the symmetrical flanged I- and T-section in areas of strain and
compression.
h Height of square, I and T sections.
h f , h′f Height of the symmetrical flanged I and T sections in areas of strain and
compression;
a , a′ the distance from the combined force in the symmetrical reinforced steel
with S and S ′ to the nearest edge of the section;
h0 , h0′ the working height of the section, symmetrically with h–à and h–a’
x compressive concrete segment height;

ξ comparative height of compressive concrete segment x h0 ;
s distance of stretch reinforced steel along the structure length
e0 eccentric of longitudinal force N with the focus of converted section,
defined subject to the instructions in 4.2.12;
e0p eccentric of the front compressive force P with with the focus of converted
section defined subject to the instructions in 4.3.6;
e0,tot eccentric of combined forces between longitudinal force N and front
compressive force P with with the focus of converted section;
e , e′ symmetrical is the distance from the point putting the longitudinal force N
to the combined force in the reinforced steel S and S ′ ;
6
TCXDVN 356: 2005
es , esp symmetrical is the symmetrical distance from the point of putting the
longitudinal force N and the front compressive force P to the focus of the
reinforced section S ;
l structure component span;
l0 the calculated length of the structure components under the impact of the
longitudinal compressive force; the value taken from tables 31,32 and
subarticle 6.2.2.16;
i inertia diameter of the cross section of structure component with the focus of
section;
d titled diameter of steel reinforced bar;
As , As' symmetrical is the section area of non-stretch reinforcement S and stretch

reinforcement; and in defining the front compressive force P – symmetrical
is the area of non-strain reinforced section segment S and S' ;
Asp , Asp
'
symmetrical is the area of stretch reinforced section segment S and S ′
Asw section area of belt reinforcement put in the perpendicular plane to structure
component longitudinal axis and cut through diagonal section;
As,inc section area of diagonal reinforced bar put in the angle sloping plane to
structure component longitudinal axis and cut through diagonal section;
μ reinforcement content defined as a ratio between reinforcement section area
S and cross section area of structure component bh0 , excluding the strain
and compressive flanged segments;
A the entire cross section area of the concrete;
Ab the section area of the compressive concrete segment;
Abt the section area of the strain concrete segment;
Ared converted section area of structure component, defined as in subarticle

4.3.6;
Aloc1 partial compressive concrete area
Sb′ 0 , Sb 0 the static moment of the symmetrical section area of the compressive and
strain concrete segments with the neutralized axis;
Ss 0 , Ss′ 0 static moment of symmetrical reinforcement section area S and S ′ with
neutralized axis;
7
TCXDVN 356: 2005
I inertia moment of concrete section with section focus of structure
component;
I red inertia moment of converted section with its focus, defined subject to
instructions in subarticle 4.3.6;
Is inertia moment of reinforced section with structure component section focus;
Ib0 inertia moment of section having compressive concrete segment with

neutralized axis;
I s 0 , I s′ 0 inertia moment of symmetrical reinforced section S and S ′ with neutralized
axis;
Wred bending resistant moment of converted section of structure component with
exterior strain fiber, defined as same as elastic materials subject to
instructions in subarticle 4.3.6;
3.3.2 Features of reinforcement position in cross section of structure component

S Symbols of longitudinal reinforcement
 when it exists two strain and compressive concrete section segments
impacted by the external force : S displays the reinforcement in strain
segment;
 when there is the entire compressive concrete segment : displays the
reinforcement in a less compressive edge;
 when there is the entire strain concrete segment:
+ for eccentric strain structure components : it displays reinforcement in a
more strain edge;
+ for central strain structure component : it displays the reinforcement put
on the entire cross section of the structure component;
S′ Symbol of longitudial reinforcement :
 when it exists two strain and compressive concrete section segments
impacted by the external force : S ′ displays the reinforcement in
compressive segment;
 when there is the entire compressive concrete segment : displays the
reinforcement in a more compressive edge;
8
TCXDVN 356: 2005
 When there is the entire strain concrete segment with eccentric strain
structure components : it displays the reinforcement in a less strain edge
with eccentric strain structure component;
3.3.3 Exterior and interior forces

F centralized exterior force;
M bending moment;
Mt spiral moment;
N longitudinal force;
Q shear force.
3.3.4 Material features

Rb , Rb, ser longitudinal axis calculated compressive strength of concrete symmetrical
with primary and secondary limited states;
Rbn longitudinal axis standard compressive strength of concrete symmetrical
with primary limited states (prism strength);
Rbt , Rbt , ser longitudinal axis calculated strain strength of concrete symmetrical with
primary and secondary states;
Rbtn longitudinal axis standard strain strength of concrete symmetrical with
primary limited states;
R bp concrete strength when beginning to bear front stress;
Rs , Rs,ser calculated strain strength of reinforcement symmetrical with primary and

secondary limited states;
Rsw calculated strain strength of cross reinforcement defined subject to
requirements in subarticle 5.2.2.4;
Rsc calculated compressive strength of reinforcement symmetrical with primary
limited states;
Eb beginning elastic modulus of compressive and strain concrete;
Es reinforcement elastic modulus.
3.3.5 Features of front stress structure components

P front compressive force, defined by the formula (8) with regard to stress
waste in reinforcement symmetrical with individual working stage of
structure component;
9
TCXDVN 356: 2005
′
σ sp , σ sp symmetrical is front stress in reinforcement S và S ′ before compressing
concrete when stretching reinforcement on plateform (front stretch) or at
the time front stress value in concrete being reduced not by impacting on
the structure component with real or conventional exterior force. Real or
conventional exterior force shall be defined subject to requirements in
subarticles 4.3.1 and 4.3.6.
σ bp compressive stress in concrete during the process of front compression,
defined subject to subarticles 4.3.6 and 4.3.7 with regard to stress waste in
reinforcement symmetrical with individual working stage of structure
component;
γ sp precision co-efficient when stretching reinforcement, defined subject to
the requirements in subarticle 4.3.5.
4 General instructions
4.1 Basic principles

4.1.1 Concrete and concrete reinforced structures shall be calculated and composed, selected
with materials and dimensions to make sure that there are not any limited states of
required reliability.
4.1.2 The selection of structure solutions shall be reasonably economic and technical when
applying them in specific construction conditions, consider the minimization of
materials, energy, work force and construction costs by :
 Using materials and structures effectively;
 Reducing structure weight;
 Utilizing physical and mechanical features of materials;
 Using the local materials
4.1.3 In designing buildings and constructions, it shall sketch out a structure diagram, select
the section dimension and disposition reinforced steel to assure of the durability,
stability and space non-deformation for all the structures, as well as for individual
structure components during the period of construction and usage.
4.1.4 Assembled structures shall be suitable with a mechanical production condition in
professional factories.
When selecting the components for assembled structures, take priority in using front
stressed structures made from concrete and high intensity reinforced steel, as well as
10
TCXDVN 356: 2005
structures from light concrete and honey cell concrete if there is not any limitation
requirement subject to the relevant standards.
Should select, combine concrete reinforced components assembled on a reasonable
degree which is accepted by the transport and installation production condition.
4.1.5 For on-site structures, it shall agree with the dimensions so as to be able to use multi-
rotated casings, as well as using space reinforced frames produced subject to modulus.
4.1.6 For assembled structures, pay a special attention to the durability and longevity of
connected knots.
It should apply the technological solutions and composition to make sure that the knots
could carry the force strongly, assure of the durability of the components in the
connected area and the adhesion of the new concrete mixed with the old concrete of
the structures.
4.1.7 Concrete structure components being used
a) almost in compressive structure components, the eccentric of longitudinal force
does not exceed the limit specified in subarticle 6.1.2.2.
b) in some compressive structure components having big eccentric, as well as in
bending structure components when the damage to them does not cause any direct
harm to human beings and the equipment perfectibility (particulars on continuous
floor etc.)
NOTE: The structure components are concrete components if their durability during
the using process is assured by the conrete only.
4.2 Basic requirements about calculation

4.2.1 Reinforced concrete structures shall meet the durability calculation requirements
(primary limited states) and normal using conditions (secondary limited states).
a) The primary limited states are calculated to assure the structure :
 not be brittle damage, or any other kinds of damage (in necessary case, it calculates
the durability with regard to structure deflection at the time before being
damaged);
 not to be unstable about the shape (durability calculation of slender wall structures),
or position (anti-upturn and anti-slipping calculation of soil guard wall, anti-
floating calculation of sunk or underground tanks, pump station, etc.)
11
TCXDVN 356: 2005
 not be damaged due to fatigue (calculating fatigue for structure components or
structures bearing repeated mobile or impulsive load , e.g. bridge crane beam,
frame foundation, floor that puts some machines imbalance);
 Not to be damaged due to concurrent impact of force factors and environmental
disadvantageous influences (periodic or regular impact of erosion or fire
environement).
b) Calculating for the secondary limited states to make sure of normal working of
structures so as :
 not to form or expand excessive or long-term cracks if the using condition is not
allowed to form or expand the long-term cracks.
 not allow any deformations beyond the limit (deflection, revovling angle, sliding,
swinging angle)
4.2.2 Calculating structures overall, as well as its necessary individual structure component
for every stage like production, transport, construction, using and repair. The
calculation diagram for each stage shall be suitable for the selected composition
solution.
It allows not to calculate, and test the crack expansion and deformation if after
experiencing and using relevant structures it confirmed : the crack width at each stage
shall not exceed the accepted value and the structures are rigid enough at the stage of
using.
4.2.3 When calculating structures, the load and impact values, reliability co-efficient of load,
combined co-efficient, load reduction co-efficient, as well as regular and temporary
load classification shall be taken subject to applicable standards of load and impact.
The load mentioned in the calculation of secondary limited states shall be taken
subject to instructions in subarticles 4.2.7 and 4.2.11.
NOTE:
1) In areas where the atmosphere is so hot that the structures not well-protected shall
suffer sunny radiation, it should regard to atmospheric heat impact.
2) For structures that contact with water (or stay under water), it shall regard to
reverse pressure of water (load taken subject to water construction structure design
standard).
3) Concrete and reinforced concrete structures shall be fire-proof subject to
requirments of applicable standards.
12
TCXDVN 356: 2005
4.2.4 When calculating structure components of assembled structures with regard to
supplement interior force arisen in the process of transport and installation by crane,
the load of structure component weight shall be multiplied by motive power co-
efficient which is equal 1,6 when transporting and 1,4 when installation by crane. For
the motive power co-efficients above, if possible, take lower values, but not less than
1,25.
4.2.5 Semi-assembled as well as entire structures using strength framework bearing
construction load shall be calculated the durability, formation and expansion of cracks
and deformation according to two working stages as follows :
c) Before the newly poured concrete reaches the required strength, structures shall be
calculated the load due to the concrete weight and every other load impacted during
the process of pouring.
d) After the newly poured concrete reaches the required strength, the structures shall
be calculated the load impacted during the process of construction and the load
when using.
4.2.6 The interior force of super static reinforced concrete structures impacted by load and
compulsory displacement (due to temperature change, mositure of concrete,
supporting movement etc.), asll well as the interior force of steadily static structures
when calculating according to the deformation diagram, shall be defined with regard to
flexible deformation of concrete, reinforcement and the presence of cracks.
For structures which interior force calculation method regards to the flexible
deformation of unfinished concrete, as well as in the midde stages of calculation of
super static structures with regard to flexible deformation, allows the hypothesized
interior force definition of linear elastic working materials.
4.2.7 Anti-crack ability of structures or structure components is classified by three levels
depending on their working conditions and used steel reinforcement.
Level 1: not allow to display any cracks;
Level 2: Allow the short-term crack expansion with limited width acrc1 , but make sure
that the crack will be tightened;
Level 3: Allow the short-term crack expansion with limited width acrc1 and the long-
term crack expansion, but with limited width acrc 2 .
Short-term crack width is understood as the crack expansion if the structures bear the
concurrent impact of regular and temporary short-term and long-term load.
13
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Long-term crack width is understood as crack expansion when the structures only bear
the impact of regular and long-term temporary load.
Anti-crack level of reinforced concrete structure, as well as accepted limited width
value of the crack in the non-erosion environment condition in table 1 (absorbent limit
gurantee for structures) and table 2 (safety for reinfrocement)
Table 1 – Anti-crack level and limited width value of the crack,

to safeguard the absorbent limit
Anti-crack level and limited width value of

Working condition of structures the crack, mm
to safeguard the absorbent of structures
When the
entire section Level 1*
1. Structures is strained
acrc1 = 0.3
bearing the liquid When one acrc 2 = 0.2
or gas pressure segment of
Level 3
section is
compressed
2. Structures bearing pressure of acrc1 = 0.3
Level 3
separate materials acrc 2 = 0.2
* Take priority in using front stress structures. When there is any surefire basic, it
may allow to use the structures with no front stress with required anti-crack level 3.
The load used in calculating reinforced concrete structures on condition of formation,

expansion or tightening cracks take from table 3.
If in structures or their components have anti-crack requirement level 2 and 3 which
under the impact of symmetrical load with table 3 non-formed cracks, it will not
calculate in condition of short-term crack expansion and crack tightening (for level 2),
or in condition of short-term and long-term crack expansion (for level 3).
Anti-crack requirements for reinforced concrete structures mentioned above shall
apply for straight angle and diagonal cracks with structure longitudinal axis.
To avoid the longitudinal crack expansion, it should have composition solutions (e.g.
place the reinforcement across). For front stress structures, besides above solutions, it
should limit the compressive stress in concrete in the process of concrete front
compression (see sub-article 4.3.7)
14
TCXDVN 356: 2005
4.2.8 At fixed-end butts of the front stress structures with non-anchor reinforcement, it shall
not allow cracks in stress conveying segments (see sub-article 5.2.2.5) when regular
load structures, temporary short-term and long-term with the co-efficient γ f equal 1,0.
In this case, front stress of reinforcement in the process of stress conveying shall be
considered increased linear from value 0 to the biggest calculated value.
It allows not to use above requirements for lying section segment from converted
section focus level to strain edge (to section height) when there has an impact of front
stress, if in this section segment not having non-anchor strain reinforcement.
Table 2 – Anti-crack level of reinforced concrete structures and limited crack

width value acrc1 and acrc 2 to safeguard the structures
Anti-crack level and values acrc1 and acrc 2 , mm
Bar steel group Bar steel group Bar steel group

CI, A-I, CII, A- A-V, A-VI AT-VII
II, CIII, A-III,
A-IIIB,
Working condition
CIV A-IV
of structures
Fiber steel Fiber steel group Fiber steel group B-II
group B-II and Bp-II, K- and Bp-II và K-7
B-I và Bp-I 7, K-19 having the having the diameter
diameter not less not less than 3,0 mm
than 3,5 mm
1. In a covered place level 3 level 3 level 3
acrc1 = 0.4 acrc1 = 0.3 acrc1 = 0.2
acrc 2 = 0.3 acrc 2 = 0.2 acrc 2 = 0.1
2. Outdoor or inside Level 3 Level 3 Level 2

the land, on above or
acrc1 = 0.4 acrc1 = 0.2
below underground acrc1 = 0.2
water level. acrc 2 = 0.3 acrc 2 = 0.1
3. Inside the land Level 3 Level 2 Level 2

that has frequently
changeable acrc1 = 0.3
acrc1 = 0,2 acrc1 = 0.1
underground water acrc 2 = 0.2
level
15
TCXDVN 356: 2005
NOTE: 1. Symbols of steel group see sub-article 5.2.1.1 and 5.2.1.9.
2. For cable steel, regulations in this table are applied for exterior steel fiber.
3. For structures using steel reinforcement with bar group A-V, working in a covered
place or outdoor, when having experience in designing and using the structures, it
allows to increase the value acrc1 and acrc 2 up to 0,1 mm in comparison with other
values in this table.
4.2.9 In the case that when bearing the impact of used load, according to the calculation of
front stress compressive structure component segment appearing straight angle cracks
with structure component longitudinal axis in the production, transport and installation
stages, it shall regard to the reduction of anti-crack ability of strain segment, as well as
deflection increase in the usage process.
For structure component calculated to bear the impact of repeated load, it shall not
allow any cracks mentioned above.
4.2.10 For reinforced concrete structures that have less reinforcement, their strength has been
lost while forming cracks in strain concrete segment (see sub-article 7.1.2.8), the strain
longitudinal reinforcement section area, it should increase at least by 15% with
required reinforcement area when calculating the durability.
Table 3 – Load and reliability co-efficient of load γ f
Anti-crack Load and reliability co-efficient γ f when calculating in conditions

level of Crack expansion
reinforced Short-term Long-term Crack
Crack forming
concrete tightening
structures
Regular load; long-term
temporary and short-
1 – – –
term temporary load
with γ f > 1,0*
Regular load; long-term Regular load; Regular load;

temporary and short- long-term long-term
term temporary load temporary and temporary
with γ f > 1.0* short-term load with γ f
2 –
(calculating to make sure temporary load = 1.0*
of the necessity of with γ f =
testing in condition of 1.0*
not expanding short-term
16
TCXDVN 356: 2005
cracks and tightening
them )
Regular load; long-term T Regular
temporary and short- load; long-
term temporary load term
with γ f = 1.0* temporary
3 Like above –
(calculating to make sure load with γ f
of the necessity of = 1.0*
testing in condition of
expanding cracks)
* co-efficient γ f taken as durability calculation
NOTE:
1. Long-term temporary and short-term temporary load taken as in subarticle 4.2.3.
2. Special load should be regarded when calculating in condition of crack formation
in case of cracks leading to dangers (e.g. explosion, fire etc)
4.2.11 Deflection and displacement of structure components shall not exceed the allowable
limit C. the limited deflection of common components specified in table 4.
4.2.12 When calculating the durability of concrete and reinforced concrete component under
the impact of compressive force, it shall regard to accidental eccentric ea caused by
regardless factors in the calculation.
The accidental eccentric ea in every case shall not be less than :
 1/600 component length or distance between its sections connected to prevent

displacement;
 1/30 component section height.
In addition, for assembly component, it should regard to possible mutual
displacements happening in components. These displacements shall depend on types
of component, installation method, etc.
For component of super static structures, eccentric value of longitudinal force with
converted section focus shall be taken equally to the eccentric defined in analyzing
structure statics, but not less than ea .
In components of fixed static structures, the eccentric ea shall be taken equally to the
eccentric defined in calculating statics and accidental eccentric.
Table 4 – Limited deflection of common components
17
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Types of components Deflection limit
1. Bridge crane beam with:
a) manual bridge crane 1/500L
b) electric bridge crane 1/600L
2. Flat ceiling floor, roof and suspension wall component (when
calculating the wall outside plane.)
a) when L < 6 m (1/200) L
b) when 6 m ≤ L ≤ 7.5 m 3 cm
c) when L > 7.5m (1/250)L
3. Floor with framed ceiling and stairs
a) when L < 5 m (1/200)L
b) when 5 m ≤ L ≤ 10 m 2.5 cm
c) when L > 10 m (1/400)L
NOTE: L beam span or choking plate on 2 bearings; for consol L = 2L1 with L1
consol rising length.
NOTE:
1. In designing front deflection structures, when calculating and testing allowable
deflection, it shall minus that deflection if there are not any special limits.
2. When bearing the regular load, long-term and short-term temporary load, plate or
beam deflection in every case shall not exceed 1/150 span or 1/75 consol rising
length.
3. When the limited deflection is not bonded by production and composition
technology requirements, but only required by aestheticism, the calculation of
deflection shall only take long-term impacting load. In this case, γ f = 1
18
TCXDVN 356: 2005
4.2.13 Distance between heat elastic slots shall be defined by calculation
For normal and front stress concrete reinforced structures which required anti-crack
level 3, it shall allow not to calculate the above mentioned distance if it does not
exceed the value in table 5.
Table 5 – The biggest distance between heat elastic slots allowing not to calculate,
m
Working condition of
structures
Structures
In the Indoor outdoor
ground
Assembled frame 40 35 30
With steel 30 25 20
concrete composition
Entire block
With no steel 20 15 10
composition
Assembled One storey building 72 60 48
frame
Multi-storey 60 50 40
building
Reinforced
Assembled plate frame or entire 50 40 30
concrete
block
Entire solid plate or semi-assembled 40 30 25
structure
NOTE: 1. The value in this table shall not apply for structures bearing heat under -
40°C.
2. For one-storey structures, it allows to increase the value in the table by 20%.
3. The value in this table for framed house is symmetrical with frame that has no
column tie or when the tie positioned in the temperature center.
4.3 Supplementary requirements when designing front stress reinforced concrete

structures
4.3.1 ′ symmetrical with strain stress S and S ′ shall be
Front stress value σ sp and σ sp
selected with erroneous ratio p to satisfy the following conditions:
19
TCXDVN 356: 2005
σ sp (σ ' sp ) + p ≤ Rs, ser ⎫⎪
(1)
σ sp (σ ' sp ) − p ≥ 0,3 Rs, ser ⎪⎭
⎬
where: p measure by MPa, defined by:
 mechanical strain method: p = 0,05 σ sp ;

360
 mechanical and thermo-electric strain method: p = 30 + (2)
l
with l – strain reinforcement length (distance between exterior edges of platform), mm.
In case of automatic strain, the numerator value in formula (2) shall be replaced with
90.
4.3.2 ′ 1 symmetrical with strain reinforcement S and shall be
Stress value σ con 1 and σ con
′ (see
controlled after being strained on platform, symmetrically equal σ sp and σ sp
4.3.1) minus waste from anchor deformation and reinforcement friction (see 4.3.3).
Stress value S and S ′ in strain reinforcement being controlled at the train force position
when straining reinforcement on hardened concrete shall be taken equally σ con 2 and
′ 2 , in which values σ con 2 and σ con
σ con ′ 2 defined from the condition of assured stress
′ 2 shall be calculated by the

in the calculated section. At the time, σ con 2 and σ con
formula :
⎡ p P e0p y sp ⎤
σ con 2 = σ sp − α ⎢ + ⎥ (3)
⎣ Ared I red ⎦
⎡ p P e0p y ′sp ⎤
′ 2 = σ sp
σ con ′ −α⎢ − ⎥
⎣ Ared I red ⎦
(4)
In formulas (3) và (4):
σ sp , σ sp
′ – defined with no regard stress waste;
P , e 0p – defined by formulas (8) and (9), where values σ sp and σ sp

′ with regard to
primary stress waste;

y sp , y ′sp – see 4.3.6;
α = Es E b .
Stress in reinforcement of automatically stressed structures shall be calculated from
the condition balanced with stress (caused by itself) in concrete.
20
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Stress caused by itself in structures shall be defined by concrete symbols by
automatically causing stress with regard to reinforcement content, reinforcement
distribution in concrete (by one, two or three axes), as well as in necessary cased,
regarding to stress waste due to contraction, magnetism of concrete when the structure
bearing load.
NOTE: In structures made from light concrete with levels from B7,5 to B12,5, values
′ 2 shall not exceed symmetrical values 400 MPa and 550 Mpa.
σ con 2 and σ con
4.3.3 When calculating front stress structure, it shall regard to front stress waste in
reinforcement when strain.
 When strain on platform, it should regard to :
+ Primary wastes due to anchor deformations, steel friction with direction setting
equipment, coincident reinforcement stress, temperature change, mould
deformation (when straining reinforcement on platform), quick magnetism of
concrete.
+ Secondary wastes due to contraction and magnetism of concrete.
 when strain on platform, it should regard to :
+ Primary wastes due to anchor deformation, reinforcement friction with pipe
wall to position steel (cable) or with concrete surface of structures.
+ Secondary wastes : due to coincident stress in reinforcement, partial
compression of reinforcement circles on concrete surface, joint knot
deformation between concrete blocks (for assembled structures from blocks).
Stress waste in reinforcement shall be defined in table 6, but the total stress waste
values shall not be less than 100Mpa.
When calculating automatically causing components, it shall regard to the stress waste
caused by contraction and magnetism of concrete according to automatic front stress
concrete symbols and moisture of environment.
For automatic stress causing structures working in water saturated conditions, it shall
not regard to stress waste due to contraction.
Table 6 – Stress waste
Factors causing stress Stress waste value, MPa

waste in steel
When strain on plateform When strain on
reinforcement
concrete
21
TCXDVN 356: 2005
A. Primary wastes
1. Slack stress in
reinforcement.
When strained by
mechanics method.
⎛ σ ⎞
a) for fiber steel ⎜ 0,22 sp − 0,1⎟ σ sp
⎜ Rs,ser ⎟ –
⎝ ⎠
b) for bar steel 0,1σ sp − 20 –

when strained by
thermo-electricity or
mechanical thermo-
electricity method.
a) for fiber steel 0,05σ sp –
b) for bar steel 0,03σ sp –
here: σ sp , MPa, taken with no

regard to stress waste. If the
calculated waste value is “
minus ”, take value equal 0.
22
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Table 6 – Ttress waste (continued)

waste in steel
When strain on plateform When strain on concrete
reinforcement
2. Disparity between For concrete level from B15 to B40:
strain reiforcement in 1.25 Δt –
burned segment and For concrete level B45 and more :
strain force equipment
1.0 Δt –
when concrete is
In which: Δt - temperature disparity
heated.
between burned reinforcement and fixed
strain platform (outside burned segment)
taking strain force. In lack of exact data,
take Δt = 65oC.
When straining reinforcement in the
process of increasing heat to the value
enough to recover the stress waste due to
temperature disparity, take equally 0.
3. Deformation of Δl Δl1 + Δl2

Es Es
anchor at strain l l
equipment
where: Δl – deformation of compressed where: Δl1 – deformation
buffer circles, anchor heads are partially of screw nuts or buffe
compressed, take equally 2mm; when plates between anchor
there is a slip between steel reinforced and concrete, take equally
bars in binding equipment repeatly used 1mm;
Δl , defined by the formula : Δl 2 – Deformation o
Δl = 1.25 + 0.15 d tumbler anchor, ancho
with d – steel reinforced bar diameter, screw nut, take equally
mm; 1mm.
l – strain reinforcement length (distance l – strain reinforcemen
between exterior edges of supportings on length (one fiber), o
frame plateform or equipment), mm. structure component, mm
When strained by thermo-electricity,
23
TCXDVN 356: 2005
anchor deformation caused waste has
already been regarded when defining the
whole long stretch of reinforcement.
24
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Table 6 – stress waste (continued)

waste in steel
When strain on plateform When strain on concrete
reinforcement
4. Friction of steel
reinforcement
a) with drain wall or ⎛ 1 ⎞
σ sp ⎜1 − ωχ +δθ
⎟
concrete surface. ⎝ e ⎠
where: e – natural logic;
δ , ω – co-efficient, defined as in
table 7;
χ – length from strain equipment
to calculated section, m;
θ – total angle direction movement
of axis reinforcement, radian;
σ sp – taken with no regard to stress
waste.
b) with direction ⎛ 1 ⎞
σ sp ⎜ 1 − ⎟
moulding equipment ⎝ e δθ ⎠
where: e – natural logic;
δ – co-efficient, equal 0,25;
θ –total angle direction
movement of axis
reinforcement, radian;
σ sp – taken with no regard
to stress waste.
5. Deformation of steel Δl
η Es
molding when l
producing front stress
reinforced concrete
structures.
25
TCXDVN 356: 2005
where: η– co-efficient, –
taken equally:
n −1
+ η= , when straining
2n
the reinforcement by
halberd;
n −1
+η = , When straining
4n
reinforcement by
mechanical thermo-
electricity using winch
(50% force due to load of
heavy things)
26
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Factors leading to the Stress waste value, Mpa

stress waste in
reinforced steel
concrete
n – Reinforced steel group strained not
concurrently
Δl – The movement closer between
supportings on the plateform along the
direction impacted by the force P ,
defined by the calculated frame
deformation.
l – Distance between exterior edges of
suportings on the strain plateform.
When lacking the production
technology data and frame structures,
the waste due to frame deformation
shall be equal 30 Mpa.
When strained by thermo-electricity,
the waste due to frame deformation in
the calculation shall not not included
because they have already been
included in defining the entire length
slackeing of the reinforced steel.
6. Quick magnetism
of concrete
a) For natural σ bp σ bp
40 khi ≤α
hardening concrete R bp Rbp
⎛ σ bp ⎞ σ bp
40α + 85β ⎜ − α ⎟ khi >α
⎜ R bp ⎟ R bp
⎝ ⎠
27
TCXDVN 356: 2005
where α and β – co-efficients, taken
as folows:
α = 0,25 + 0,025 R bp , but not more
than 0,8;
β = 5,25 – 0,185 R bp , but not more
than n 2,5 but not less than 1,1;
σ bp – Defined at longitudinal steel
reinforcement focus level S and S ′
with regard to waste subject to items 1
to 5 in this table.
For light concrete, when the strength at
the starting time causing front stress is
equal 11 MPa or less than, the co-
efficient 40 will be 60.
b) For heat nourished The waste shall be calculated by the
concrete formual in tiem 6a of this table, then
multiplied by 0,85.
28
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Factors leading to the Stress waste value, MPa

stress waste in
reinforced steel
concrete
B. Secondary wastes
7. Slack stress in
reinforced steel
a) For mesh steel – ⎛ σ ⎞
⎜ 0.22 sp − 0.1⎟ σ sp
⎜ R s , ser ⎟
⎝ ⎠
b) For slab steel – 0.1σ sp − 20
(see annotation for
item 1 in this table)
8. concrete contraction Naturally Heat nourished concrete Not depending on the
(see 4.3.4) hardening in atmospheric pressure hardening conditon of
concrete condition concrete
Heavy a) B35 and 40 35 30
concrete lower
b) B40 50 40 35
c) B45 and 60 50 40
higher
d) group A Wastes are defined by items 8a, b 40
in this table and mulitiplied by the
coefficient1,3
Small e) Group B Wastes are defined by item 8a 50
stone in this table and multiplied by the
concrete co-efficient1,5
f) Group C Wastes are defined by item 8a 40
in this table as same as the heavy
concrete with natural hardening
light g) solid type 50 45 40
29
TCXDVN 356: 2005
concrete h) hollow 70 60 50
with type
small
reinforce
d
materials
9. Magnetism of
concrete (see subarticle
4.3.4)
a) For heavy and light 150 α σ bp Rbp when σ bp Rbp ≤ 0,75 ;
concrete with small
300 α (σ bp R bp − 0,375) when σ bp R bp > 0,75 ,
reinforced materials.
where: σ bp – taken the same as in item 6 of this table
α – co-efficient, taken as follows:
+ with natrual hardening concrete, take α = 1;
+ with heat nourished concrete in atmospheric pressure
condition, take α = 0,85.
30
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Table 6 – Loss of stress (end)
Factors causing a loss of Value of stress loss, MPa

concrete stress
As tension in a platform As tension in concrete
b)The fine group A The loss is counted basing on the formula in the article 9a
concrete in the table, then the result will be multiplied by the
coefficient 1.3
group B The loss is counted basing on the formula in the article 9a
in the table, then the result will be multiplied by the
coefficient 1.5
group C The loss is counted basing on the formula in the article 9a
in the table when α = 0,85
c) The fine bare aggregate- The loss is counted basing on the formula in the article 9a
using light concrete in the table, then the result will be multiplied by the
coefficient 1.2.
10. The concrete surface is – 70 – 0,22 d ext
pressed locally because the with: d ext – external
reinforcement has helical
diameter of structure, cm
and round shape (when the
strucutre’s diameter is less
than 3m)
11. Compressive – Δl
n Es
deformation due to a joint l
31
TCXDVN 356: 2005
between units (for the unit With : n – quantity of
built-up structure) joints between structure
and other equipments along
the length of tension strand;
Δl – press deformation at
each joint:
+ To the concrete –
casting joint, Δl = 0,3
mm;
+ To the directly
engaged joint, Δl =
0,5 mm;
l – length of the tension
strand, mm.
NOTES:
1. Loss of stress in the tension strand S ′ is defined as the same as the one of the
strand S ;
2. To self-force ferro concrete, loss due to shrinkage and creep of concrete is defined
under the experimental data.
3. Symbol of concrete’s endurability level, refer to the article 5.1.1.
4.3.4 When determining loss of stress by shrinkage and creepage of concrete as the article 8
and 9, pay attention to the following:
a) When the load placement time on structure is known in advance, loss of stress needs
to be multiplied by the coefficient ϕ l , defined as the following formula:
4t
ϕl = (5)
100 + 3t
With: t – unit of time is day, defined as follow:

 When determining loss of stress due to creepage: counting from the day that
concrete is loaded;
 When determining loss of stress due to shrinkage: counting from the day that ends
concrete load.
b) To the structure for the environment with the atmospheric moisture capacity which
is less than 40%, loss of stress needs to be increased 25%. To the heavy and fine
32
TCXDVN 356: 2005
concrete structure in the area with a hot climate and without any protection from
the solar radiation, loss of stress needs to be increased 50%.
c) If type of cement, concrete ingredients, manufacturing condition and structure usage
is known well, it is allowed to use the more accurate methods to define loss of
stress once those methods are proved to be compliance on the current regulations.
Table 7 – The coefficients to define loss of stress by a friction of strand
Coefficients to define loss of stress by frictional strand (see

the article 4, table 6)
The pipe with groove
δ when the strand is
or touching surface
ω Sheaf of steel or steel
Bars with edge
fibre
1. Type of grooved
pipe
– with metal surface 0,0030 0,35 0,40
– with concrete
surface which is made
by a mold with hard
pith 0 0,55 0,65
– with concrete
surface which is made
by a mold with soft
pith 0,0015 0,55 0,65
2. Concreted surface 0 0,55 0,65
4.3.5 When define value of pre-stress of the strand, it is multiplied by a coefficient of

accuracy rating as the tension strand γ sp :
γ sp = 1 ± Δ γ sp (6)
In the formula (6), the sign “+” is used if there is disadvantageous effect of pre-
stress (meaning that during a certain operating time of a structure or a part of
components, the fore-stress lessens the bearing, speeding up the formation of
crevice, etc...); the sign “-“ for the advantageous impact.
In the case that the pre-stress is built up by the mechanical method, the value Δ γ sp is
0,1; When the pre-stress is built up by the thermo-electric and mechanical thermo-
electric method, Δ γ sp is define by the following formula:
33
TCXDVN 356: 2005
P ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟
Δγ sp = 0,5 1+ (7)
σ sp ⎜ n p ⎟⎠
⎝
But it must not be less than 0,1;
In the formula (7):
p , σ sp – refer to the article 4.3.1;
n p – quantiry of the tension bars in component’s section.
When defining loss of stress for the strand as well as when doing calculation based on
the expanding status of crevice and based on the deformation, Δγ sp is allowed to be 0.
4.3.6 When stress in the concrete and reinforcement as well as the pre-compressive force in
the concrete are used to calculate the concrete structure, the stress is defined as follow:
The stress in the section perpendicularing to the components’ longitudinal axis is
defined basing on calculative regulations for the elastic material. Among them, the
assumed section is a equivalent section – including concrete section which mentions to
a weakness reduction due to conduit, groove and the longitudinal strands’ section area
(tension or non-tension) multiplied by the coefficient α - a ratio between elastic
modulus of the longitudinal strand E s and concrete Eb . When the section in which
there is concrete with many types and levels of different strength, it must be converted
into one type or one level of strength basing on the ratio of their elastic modulus.
Pre-compressive stress P and its eccentricity e0 p comparing with the converted
section’s center of gravity are defined as the following formula:
P = σ sp Asp + σ sp ′ Asp ′ − σ s As − σ s′ As′ (8)
σ sp Asp y sp + σ s′ As′ y ′s − σ sp ′ y ′sp − σ s As y s
′ Asp
e0 p = (9)
P
With:
σ s and σ s′ – being a stress in the non-tension strand S và S ′ caused by shrinkage
and creepage in concrete;
y sp , y ′sp , y s , y ′s – being a distance from the converted section’s center of gravity to
the points at which the force aggregate of the inner force in the tension strand S and
the non-tension strand S ′ (figure 1).
34
TCXDVN 356: 2005
σ's A's
σ'sp A'sp
y's
y'sp
®−êng ®i qua träng t©m
tiÕt diÖn quy ®æi
e0p
ysp
P
ys
σsp Asp
σs As
Figure 1 – Drawing of the pre-compressive force in the

tension in the cross section of ferro-concrete components
In the case of curviform tension strand, values σ sp and σ sp

′ is multiplied by cos θ and
cos θ ′ , with θ and θ ′ are a angle of inclination between the strand axis and the
components’ longitudinal axis (at the defined section).
′ are defined as follow:
Coefficients σ sp and σ sp
a) In the stage of compressing prior to concrete loading: including the first losses.
b) In the stage of usage: including the first and second loss of stress
Value of stress σ s and σ s′ is counted as follow:
c) In the stage of compressing prior to concrete loading: used the same as loss of stress
due to a quick creepage as the article 6, table 6.
d) In the procgress of usage: used as equally as total loss of stress caused by a
shrinkage and creepage of the concrete as the article 6, 8 and 9, table 6.
4.3.7 Compressive stress in the concrete σ bp at the stage of compressing pbefore concrete
must meet the conditions fully: ratio σ bp Rbp does not exceed the values in the table
8.
Stress σ bp defined at the far outside compress-bearing fibre of the concrete, including
loss follows the article 1 – 6, table 6 and the accuracy coefficient as the tension
strand γ sp = 1 .
Table 8 – Ratio between the compression stress in the concrete σ bp at the stage of
compressing before concrete loading and the intensity of concrete Rbp when it
starts to get the pre-stress σ bp Rbp
Method for the tension Ratio σ bp Rbp is not more

Stress status of section
strand than
35
TCXDVN 356: 2005
As the As the
compression compression
is plumb in is off-center
the center
1. Stress with reduction On the platform (Pre-

0,85 0,95*
or without change when tension)
the structure bears effect On the concrete (Post-
of an external force. 0,70 0,85
tension)
On the platdorm (pre-
2. Stress increases when 0,65 0,70
tension)
the structure is effected
by an external force. On the concrete (Post-
0,60 0,65
tension)
* Applied for the components which are manufactured under conditions of increasing
compression force. When there are parts which are united by steel at abuttal and
indirect reinforcement with steel content as volume μ v ≥ 0,5% (see the article 8.5.3)
on the length which is not shorter than the one to transmit stress l p (see the article
5.2.2.5), the value σ bp Rbp = 1,0 .
NOTE: to the light concrete from B7,5 to B12,5, the value σ bp Rbp should be over 0,3.
4.3.8 To the pre-stress structure whose compression stress in concrete is designed to be able
to be adjusted during usage (for example: in the pile, container, television town), needs
to use the unadhensive tension strand, there needs to be the efficient methods to
protect the strand from eroding. To the unadhensive pre-stress structure, it is counted
basing on the requirements of crack resistance at rate 1.
4.4 The general regulations to calculate flat construction and big block construction
including non-linearness of ferro-concrete
4.4.1 Calculating the system of concrete structure and ferro-concrete (linear structure, flat
structure, space frame and big block structure) to the first and second limited status is
done basing on stress, inner force, deformation and transposition. Those stress, inner
force, deformation and transposition elemetns are calculated from the inner force’s
effects to the above structures (creating structure system of house and project) and
including physical non-linearness, non-isotropy and in some cases, including creepage
agglomeration of damages (in long process) and geometical non-linearness (almost for
the structures with thin ramparts).
36
TCXDVN 356: 2005
NOTE: Non-isotropy is not similar in characteristics (meaning mechanical ones) in
different directions. Tính trực hướng is a kind of non-isotropy, among; the
unsimilarity in nature is based on the directions which belong to the từng đôi một
three symmestic, perpendicular planes.
4.4.2 We also consider the physical non-linearness, the non-isotropy and creepage in the
interrelations which is determined in the stress and deformation relationship as well as
the strength and crack resistance condition. Thus, the components’ deformation should
be devided into two stages: before and after formation of crack.
4.4.3 Before the formation of crack, the trực hướng non-linear model to concrete must be
used. This model allows to include an orientation development of expansibility and the
identicallessness of the deformation as compressing and pulling. The concrete’s same
isotropy model is allowed to use. This model permits to include the said elements’
present in three directions. To the ferro-concrete, calculating during this stage needs to
be based on simultaneous deformation along the strand’s axis and its surrounding
concrete, exception the far end of the strand which cannot be used specialized anchor.
When the strand are under risk of bulging, the limited compressive stress value should
be constrained.
NOTE: Expansibility is a development of object’s volume when compressed because
there is a development of cracks as we as the cracks become longer.
4.4.4 According to the concrete’s strength condition, the stress aggregate also needs to be
considered in different directions because the compressed-resistant intensity of two or
three axes is more than the one of an axis. When it is compressed and pulled at the
same time, the intensity can be less than as the concrete is only compressed or pulled.
In the necessary cases, the durability of stress’s efffect should be paid attention.
The ferro concrete’s strength without cracks is established basing on the strength
condition of materials when the ferro-concrete is considered as a two element
environment.
4.4.5 The strength condition of the concrete in the two element environment is used for
conditions which cause cracks.
4.4.6 After the cracks appears, we should use the general model of isotropicless object in the
non-linear relationship between the inner force or stress and transposition, mentioning
the following elements:
 The crack’s angle of inclination against the strand and its diagram;
 Expension of cracks and slide of cracks’ marginal line;
37
TCXDVN 356: 2005
 Hardness of the strand:
+ Direction along the axis: mentioned to the strand’s attachament to a range
or section of concrete between cracks.
+ Tangential direction with cracks’ marginal line: mentioned to the softness
of concrete portion at the marginal line of crack, longitudinal stress and the
correlative stress of the strand at the crack;
 Hardness of the concrete:
+ Between cracks: considering the longitudinal force and slide of concrete
portion at cracks (in the diagram of crossing cracks, the hardness is
reduced);
+ At the cracks: considering the longitudinal and slide of concrete portion at
the crack’s marginal line;
 Partially vanishing the simultaneity of deformation along the strand’s axis and
concrete between cracks.
To the deformation of components without the strand, which have crack, just
considering the hardness of concrete at the pan between cracks.
To the case which the oblique cracks appear, considering specific characteristics of
concrete deformation at the upper area of cracks.
4.4.7 Width of crack and relatively sliding movement of crack’s marginal lines are defined
based on the steel bars’ differently derecting movement against the cracks’ marginal
lines crossing them, considering the distrance between cracks and simultaneous
movement condition.
4.4.8 The strenght condition of the flat components and big block structure which have
crack, is defined basing on the following supposition:
 Damage occuring due to the remarkably expanded strand at the most dangerous
cracks is often in sloping to the bars and causes a breakage of concrete range or
block between cracks or outside cracks (for example: at the compressed areas on
cracks)
 The compressed-resistant intensity of the concrete is reduced because the tensile
stress is generated by the adhensive force between concrete and strand, which are
pulled perpendiculerly and because of the strand’s horizontal movement closely
to the cracks’ marginal lines;
38
TCXDVN 356: 2005
 When determining the concrete’s intensity, the diagram of crack formation and
crack’s inclining angle to the strand are considered;
 The normal stress in the bars along the strand’s axis is considered. It is allowed to
be mentioned to the tangent stress of the strand at area of cracks (Nagen effect),
in condition that the steel bars does not change their direction;
 At the damaged cracks, the bars which cross by the cracks, have the assumed pull-
bearing intensity (to the strand without melting limitation, stress needs to checked
during doing calculaion of its deformation).
The intensity of the concrete at different areas will be evaluated under stresses in the
concrete which is considered as a element of two-element environment (excluding the
converted stress in the strand between defined cracks, including stress at cracks,
adhension and vanishing partially the simultaneity of deformation along the strand’s
axis and concrete.
4.4.9 To the ferro-concrete structures which can bear small plastic deformation, it is
permitted to be defined their force-resistance by the method of limit aquilibrium.
4.4.10 When the structure is defined basing on the strength, deformation, formation and
expansion of crack by limited element method, it is suggested to check the strength
condition, crack-resistance of all structure’s elements as well as to check occuring
condition of oustanding deformation of structure.
When evaluating the limited status of the strength, it is allowed several elements to be
damaged, which does not lead to another damage to the structure and after the defining
load ends effect, the structure still operates as usual or can be recovery.
5 The material used for concrete structure and ferro-concrete
5.1 The concrete

5.1.1 Classification of concrete and the scope of usage
5.1.1.1 This standard is used for the following types of concrete::
 The heavy concrete with its average specific volume from 2200 kg/m3 - 2500
kg/m3;
 The fine concrete with its average specific volume (over 1800 kg/m3);
 The light concrete with the solid and hollow structure;
 The boiled pressure and non – boiled pressure cell concrete;
 The special concrete: self-stress concrete.
39
TCXDVN 356: 2005
5.1.1.2 Depending to function and working condition, when designing the concrete structure
and ferro-concrete, it is suggested to state the concrete’s quality standard clearly:
e) Rate of comprress-bear strength B;
f) Rate of strength which bear a pull along the axis Bt (stipulated in the specific case is
decidedly meaningful and is checked during manufacturing);
g) Mark the capacity of the waterproof, noting by W (stipulated for the strucures with
waterprood limitation);
h) Mark the average specific volume D (stipulated for the structures with a
requirement of heat insulation);
i) Mark the capacity of sefl-stress S p (stipulated for the self-stress strucutres. This
feature is considered during calculation and checked during manufacturing).
NOTE: 1. The rate of compress and pllu bearing strength, MPa, must meet the
intensity value with a guarantee probability of 95%.
2. Mark the self-stress concrete as it capapcity of self-stress. It is value of stress before
concrete loading, MPa, caused by the self-expanding concrete and a content of steel
along the concrete is là μ = 0,01.
3. In order to easily use in reality, besides that stipulation, we should give more signs
to make the concrete in parentheses like this B30 (M400).
5.1.1.3 To the concrete structure and ferro-concrete, the table 9 shows a stipulation on the rate
and mark of concrete.
Table 9 – Regulations on using concrete level and mark
Classification Sort of concrete Level or mark

Upon degree of Heavy Concrete B3,5; B5; B7,5; B10; B12,5;
compressed B15; B20; B25; B30; B35;
durability B40; B45; B50; B55; B60
Self-pressure concrete B20; B25; B30; B35; B40;
B45; B50; B55; B60
Tiny-stone group A: natural solid or B3,5; B5; B7,5; B10; B12,5;
concrete nourished under B15; B20; B25; B30; B35;
condition of atmosphere B40
pressure, core material of
sand with module greater
than > 2,0
40
TCXDVN 356: 2005
group B: natural solid or B3,5; B5; B7,5; B10; B12,5;
nourished under B15; B20; B25; B30; B35
condition of atmosphere
pressure, core material of
sand with module greater
than ≤ 2,0
group C: press- distilled B15; B20; B25; B30; B35;
B40; B45; B50; B55; B60
Concrete with D800, D900 B2,5; B3,5; B5; B7,5;
light core material
D1000, D1100 B2,5; B3,5; B5; B7,5; B10;
corresponding to
B12,5
mark based on
average specific D1200, D1300 B2,5; B3,5; B5; B7,5; B10;
quantity B12,5; B15
D1400, D1500 B3,5; B5; B7,5; B10; B12,5;
B15; B20; B25; B30
D1600, D1700 B5; B7,5; B10; B12,5; B15;
B20; B25; B30; B35
D1800, D1900 B10; B12,5; B15; B20; B25;
B30; B35; B40
D2000 B20; B25; B30; B35; B40
41
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Table 9 – Regulation on using concrete level & mark (ending)
Classification Sort of concrete Level & mark

Upon degree of Beehive concrete With press- Without
compressed corresponding to distill press-distill
durability mark based on D500 B1; B1,5;
average specific
quantity D600 B1; B1,5; B2 B1,5; B2;
B2,5
D700 B1,5; B2; B1,5; B2;
B2,5; B3,5 B2,5
D800 B2,5; B3,5; B2; B2,5;
B5 B3,5
D900 B3,5; B5; B3,5; B5
B7,5
D1000 B5; B7,5; B5; B7,5
B10
D1100 B7,5; B10; B7,5; B10
B12,5; B15
D1200 B10; B12,5; B10; B12,5
B15
Hollow concrete D800, D900, D1000 B2,5; B3,5; B5
corresponding to
D1100, D1200, D1300 B7,5
mark based on
average specific D1400 B3,5; B5; B7,5
quantity:
Upon level of Heavy concrete, self-pressure concrete, tiny- Bt0,8; Bt1,2; Bt1,6; Bt2;
pulled durability stone concrete, light concrete Bt2,4; Bt2,8; Bt3,2
along axis
Upon Absorb- Heavy concrete, light concrete, tiny-stone W2; W4; W6; W8; W10;
proof mark concrete W12
Upon mark based Light concrete D800; D900; D1000;
on average D1100; D1200; D1300;
specific quantity D1400; D1500; D1600;
D1700; D1800; D1900;
D2000
42
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Beehive concrete D500; D600; D700; D800;
D900; D1000; D1100;
D1200
Hollow concrete D800; D900; D1000;
D1100; D1200; D1300;
D1400
Upon mark based self-pressure concrete S p 0,6; S p 0,8; S p 1; S p 1,2;
on sefl-pressure S p 1,5; S p 2; S p 3; S p 4.
faculty
NOTE: 1. In this criteria, terms "light concrete" and "hollow concrete" used to match to light
concrete within solid structure and light concrete with gap concrete (percentage ratio of gap
greater than 6%).
2. Group of tiny-stone concrete A, B, C need to be pointed out in designed drawing.
43
TCXDVN 356: 2005
5.1.1.4 Age of concrete in defining degree of compressed and pulled durability along axis
nominated in design is based on practical schedule from time of structure excutiving
till it begins incurring designing loading capacity, on excutive method and on solidated
condition of concrete. Without above figures, it takes age of concrete in 28 days.
5.1.1.5 For structure of ferro-concrete, it does not allow:
- Using heavy concrete and tiny-stone concrete with compressed degree of durability
less than B7,5;
- Using light concrete with compressed degree of durability less than B3,5 for one-
layer structure and B2,5 for two-layer structure.
It should use compressed degree of durability meet the following condition:
- For structure of ferro-concrete made up of heavy concrete and light concrete in
calculation of incuring repeated loading capacity: less than B15;
- For structure of ferro-concrete that is compressed in bar-shape made up of heavy
concrete, tiny-stone concrete and light concrete: not less than B15;
- For structure of ferro-concrete that is compressed in bar-shape incured with loading
capacity (ex: column under loading capacity of bridge crane, column in downstairs
of multi-storey house): not less than B25.
5.1.1.6 For self-pressure building component made up of heavy concrete, tiny-stone concrete,
and light concrete, placed strained steel rod, durability degree of concrete depend on sort
and group of strained steel rod, diameter of strained steel rod and attached equipments,
is not less than given values in Table 10.
Table10 – Regulation on using degree of concrete’s durability for previous

pressure structure
Degree of concrete’s durability

Sort and group of strained steel rod
is not less than
1. Fibre steel of group:
B-II (with attachment) B20
Bp-II (without attachment) has diameter: ≤ 5 mm B20
≥ 6 mm B30
K-7 and K-19 B30
2. Bar steel without attachment, have diameter:
44
TCXDVN 356: 2005
+ from 10 mm to 18 mm, group CIV, A-IV B15
A-V B20
A-VI and Ат-
B30
VII
+ ≥ 20 mm, group CIV, A-IV B20
A-V B25
A-VI and Ат-
B30
VII
Concrete intensity at moment of previous compression Rbp (controlled as for

compressed degree of durability) points out not less than 11 MPa, while using bar steel
of group A-VI, AT-VI, AT-VIK and AT-VII, fibre steel in high intensity without
attchment and cable steel need to point out not less than 15,5 MPa. Besides, Rbp is not
less than 50% compressed degree of concrete’s durability.
For calculated structures incurred by repeated loading capacity, when using fibre steel
rod of previous corresponding force and bar steel rod of previous corresponding force
group CIV, A-IV in any diameter, as well group A-V with diameter from 10 mm to 18
mm, minimum value of concrete level in Table 10 must increase one grade (5 MPa)
equivalent to raising intensity of concrete when beginning incurred by previous
corresponding force.
When engineering types of distinctive structure, it allows decreasing level of concrete
at minimum of one grade at 5 MPa in comparison with given values in Table 10,
concurrently with reducing intensity of concrete when beginning incurred by previous
corresponding force.
NOTE:
1. When calculating structure of ferro-concrete in previous stage of compression,
calculating trait of concrete is taken as for durability degree of concrete, which is
numeric value equal to intensity of concrete when beginning incurred by previous
corresponding force (along linear interpolation).
2. In case that engineering structures shielded a solid coat with its insulating function,
when relative value of previous compressed corresponding force σ bp Rbp is not
greater than 0,3 it allows using strained steel rod group CIV, A-IV which diameter is
not greater than 14 mm with light concrete in degree from B7,5 to B12,5, while
R bp need to point out not less than 80% durability degree of concrete.
45
TCXDVN 356: 2005
5.1.1.7 Without specific experimental evidences, it does not allow using tiny-stone concrete
for structure of ferro-concrete incurred by repeated loading capacity, as well for
structures of ferro-concrete with previous corresponding force which have span greater
than 12m in use of fibre steel group B-II, Bp-II, K-7, K-19.
When using structure of tiny-stone concrete, in order to fight eroding and guarantee
agglutination of concrete with strained steel rod in gutter and on concrete surface of
structure, compressed durability degree of concrete pointed out not less B12,5; while
using to pour into pipe, it uses concrete that its level is not less than B25.
5.1.1.8 In chocking knots joining building component to assembled structure of ferro-
concrete, nominated level of concrete depends on working condition of building
component, but taking not less than B7,5 for joint without steel rod and not less than
B15 for joint without steel rod.
5.1.2 Standard characteristic and calculating characteristic of concrete
5.1.2.1 Sorts of standard intensity of concrete include intensity in compressing along prism
sample axis (prism intensity) Rbn and intensity in pulling along axis Rbtn .
Calculating intensities of concrete when calculating along the first limit state Rb , Rbt
and along the second limit state Rb, ser , Rbt , ser are determined under the way that
standard intensity divide reliability coefficient of concrete equivalent in compressing
γ bc and pulling γ bt . Values of coefficient γ bc and γ bt is of some main concretes in
Table 11.
Table 11 – Reliability Coefficient of certain sorts of concretes when compressed γ bc and

pulled γ bt
Values γ bc and γ bt in calculating structure

according to limited condition
The first
Sort of concrete
γ bt matching to durability The second
γ bc degree of concrete γ bc , γ bt
compressed pulled
Heavy concrete, Tiny-stone concrete,

seft-pressure concrete, light concrete 1,3 1,5 1,3 1,0
and hollow concrete
46
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Beehive concrete 1,5 2,3 – 1,0
5.1.2.2 Standard intensity of concrete in compression along axis Rbn (compressed standard
intensity of concrete) depends upon compressed durability degree of concrete given
Table 12 (number is rounded up & down).
Standard intensity of concrete in pulling along axis Rbtn (pulled standard intensity of
concrete), in cases that pulled durability of concrete is not controlled under production
process determine upon compressed durability degree of concrete given Table 12.
Standard intensity of concrete in pulling along axis Rbtn (pulled standard intensity of
concrete), in cases that pulled durability of concrete is controlled under production
process take equal to pulled degree of durability with guaranteed probability.
5.1.2.3 Calculating intensities of concrete Rb , Rbt , Rb,ser , Rbt ,ser (rounded up & down) depend
on concrete’s degree of durability compressed and pulled along axis given in Table 13
and Table 14 in calculating the first limit states and Table 12 in calculating along the
second limit states.
Calculating intensities of concrete in counting on the first limit states Rb and Rbt is
reduced (or raised up) by multiplying with concrete’s coefficient of working
condition γ bi . These coefficients included in particular property of concrete, long term
of action, repeat of loading capacity, working condition and stage of structure,
production methods, section size, and so on. Value of working condition coefficient
γ bi is given in Table 15.
47
Table 12 – Standard intensities of concrete R bn , Rbtn and calculational intensity of concrete when calculating accoring to the second
limited conditions Rb, ser , Rbt , ser , MPa
Compressed durability degree of concrete

В1, В2, В3, В12,
Conditio Sort of В1 В2 В5 В7,5 В10 В15 В20 В25 В30 В35 В40 В45 В50 В55 В60
5 5 5 5
n concrete
M7 M10 M15 M150 M20 M25 M35 M40 M45 M50 M60 M70 M70 M80
M50
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Heavy concrete,
Compressed tiny-stone – – – – 2,7 3,6 5,5 7,5 9,5 11,0 15,0 18,5 22,0 25,5 29,0 32,0 36,0 39,5 43,0
along axis concrete
(prism
intensity) R bn , Light concrete – – – 1,9 2,7 3,5 5,5 7,5 9,5 11,0 15,0 18,5 22,0 25,5 29,0 – – – –
R b,ser Beehive 0,9

1,4 1,9 2,4 3,3 4,6 6,9 9,0 10,5 11,5 – – – – – – – – –
concrete 5
0,5
Heavy concrete – – – – 0,39 0,70 0,85 1,00 1,15 1,40 1,60 1,80 1,95 2,10 2,20 2,30 2,40 2,50
5
group 0,5
Pulled along – – – – 0,39 0,70 0,85 1,00 1,15 1,40 1,60 1,80 1,95 2,10 – – – –
A 5
axis Tiny-
R btn , Rbt , ser stone group 0,4
– – – – 0,26 0,60 0,70 0,85 0,95 1,15 1,35 1,50 – – – – – –
concret B 0
e
group
– – – – – – – – – 1,15 1,40 1,60 1,80 1,95 2,10 2,20 2,30 2,40 2,50
C
48
Solid
core 0,5
– – – 0,29 0,39 0,70 0,85 1,00 1,15 1,40 1,60 1,80 1,95 2,10 – – – –
materia 5
Light l
concret
e Hollow
core 0,5
– – – 0,29 0,39 0,70 0,85 1,00 1,10 1,20 1,35 1,50 1,65 1,80 – – – –
materia 5
l
Beehive 0,1 0,2 0,5
0,21 0,31 0,41 0,63 0,89 1,00 1,05 – – – – – – – – –
concrete 4 6 5
Note:
1. Group of tiny-stone concrete, refer clause 5.1.1.3.
2. Sign M indicating mark of concrete upon previous rule. Interrelation amongst values of durability rank of concrete and concrete mark
given in table A.1 and A.2, Appendix A in this criteria.
3. Intensity values of beehive concrete in table matching to beehive concrete with humidity at 10%.
4. For concrete Keramzit – Perlit with core material by sand Perlit, value Rbtn and Rbt , ser taken by value of light concrete that have core
material of spongy sand multiplying with 0,85.
5. For hollow concrete, value Rbn and Rb, ser taken alike to light concrete; and value R btn , Rbt , ser mulitiply with 0,7.
6. For seft-pressure concrete, value Rbn and Rb, ser taken alike to heavy concrete, value Rbtn , Rbt , ser multiply with 1,2.
49
Table 13 – Calculating intensities of concrete R b , Rbt in counting upon the first limited condition, MPa
Compressed degree of durability of concrete

В1, В2, В3, В7,
В1 В2 В5 В10 В12,5 В15 В20 В25 В30 В35 В40 В45 В50 В55 В60
Condition Sort of concrete 5 5 5 5
M10 M15 M20 M25 M35 M40 M45 M50 M60 M70 M70 M80
M50 M75 M150
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Heavy concrete,
Compress tiny-stone – – – – 2,1 2,8 4,5 6,0 7,5 8,5 11,5 14,5 17,0 19,5 22,0 25,0 27,5 30,0 33,0
along axis concrete
(prism
Light concrete – – – 1,5 2,1 2,8 4,5 6,0 7,5 8,5 11,5 14,5 17,0 19,5 22,0 – – – –
intensity) R b
Beehive concrete 0,63 0,95 1,3 1,6 2,2 3,1 4,6 6,0 7,0 7,7 – – – – – – – – –
Heavy concrete – – – – 0,26 0,37 0,48 0,57 0,66 0,75 0,90 1,05 1,20 1,30 1,40 1,45 1,55 1,60 1,65
Group
– – – – 0,26 0,37 0,48 0,57 0,66 0,75 0,90 1,05 1,20 1,30 1,40 – – – –
A
Pull along axis Tiny-
Rbt group
stone – – – – 0,17 0,27 0,40 0,45 0,51 0,64 0,77 0,90 1,00 – – – – – –
B
concrete
group
– – – – – – – – – 0,75 0,90 1,05 1,20 1,30 1,40 1,45 1,55 1,60 1,65
C
50
Solid
core
– – – 0,20 0,26 0,37 0,48 0,57 0,66 0,75 0,90 1,05 1,20 1,30 1,40 – – – –
materi
Light al
concrete Hollo
w core
– – – 0,20 0,26 0,37 0,48 0,57 0,66 0,74 0,80 0,90 1,00 1,10 1,20 – – – –
materi
al
Beehive concrete 0,06 0,09 0,12 0,14 0,18 0,24 0,28 0,39 0,44 0,46 – – – – – – – – –
Note:
1. Group of tiny-stone concrete, refer clause 5.1.1.3.
2. Sign M indicating mark of concrete upon previous rule. Interrelation amongst values of durability rank of concrete and concrete mark
given in table A.1 and A.2, Appendix A in this criteria.
3. Intensity values of beehive concrete in table matching to beehive concrete with humidity at 10%.
4. For concrete Keramzit – Perlit with core material by sand Perlit, value Rbtn and Rbt , ser taken by value of light concrete that have core
material of spongy sand multiplying with 0,85.
5. For hollow concrete, value Rbn and Rb, ser taken alike to light concrete; and value R btn , Rbt , ser mulitiply with 0,7.
6. For seft-pressure concrete, value Rbn and Rb, ser taken alike to heavy concrete, value R btn , Rbt , ser multiply with 1,2.
51
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Table 14 – calculating pulled intensity of concrete Rbt matching to

pulled degree of durability of concrete, MPa
Pulled degree of durability and matching

mark of concrete
Condition Sort of concrete
Bt0,8 Bt1,2 Bt1,6 Bt2,0 Bt2,4 Bt2,8 Bt3,2
K10 K15 K20 K25 K30 K35 K40

Heavy concrete, self-
Pull along pressure concrete, tiny-
0,62 0,93 1,25 1,55 1,85 2,15 2,45
axis stone concrete, light
concrete
NOTE: Sign K indicate mark of concrete along previous pulled intensity
Table 15 – Coefficient on working condition of concrete γ bi
Coefficient on
Elements included in coefficient on working condition of working condition of
concrete concrete
Sign Value
1. Repeated loading capacity Refer table
γ b1
16
2. Long-term effect feature of loading capacity: γ b2
a) When counting frequent loading capacity, long-term and
short-term temporary loading capacity, except short-term
affected loading capacity in which sum of their affected time in
a minor time of use (ex: loading capacity due of bridge crane,
loading capacity due of conveyor belt, loading capacity of
wind, loading capacity appear in the process of production,
transport and installment, and so on) ; as well including of
particular loading capacity causing deformation of uneven
subsidence, etc
– for heavy concrete, tiny-stone concrete, light concrete with
natural solidifying and concrete that is heat-fostering in
condition of environment:
52
TCXDVN 356: 2005
+ Guaranteeing concrete in continuously raising up intensity

along time (ex: environment of water, humid ground, or air
with humidity over 75%) 1,00
+ Not guaranteeing concrete in continuously raising up
intensity along time (hot and dry) 0,90
– For beehive concrete, hollow concrete is not dependent on
working condition 0,85
b) In including short-term temporary loading capacity (short-
term effect) in examining consortium or particular loading
capacity * not cited in item 2a, for sorts of concrete. 1,10
3. Pour concrete into standing direction, each layer is thick over γ b3
1,5m for:
– Heavy concrete, light concrete and tiny-stone concrete. 0,85
– Beehive concrete and hollow concrete 0,80
4. The impact of 2-axis pressure state “compressed – pulled” on Refer clause
γ b4
concrete intensity 7.1.3.1
53
TCXDVN 356: 2005
Table 15 – coefficient on working condition of concrete γ bi (ending)
Coefficient on
Elements included in coefficient on working condition of working condition of
concrete concrete
Sign Value
5. Pouring column concrete along standing direction, max
γ b5
dimension of column section is less than 30 cm 0,85
6. Stage of corresponding force prior structure γ b6
a) Using fibre steel

+ For light concrete 1,25
+ For various sorts of concrete 1,10
b) Using bar steel
+ For light concrete 1,35
+ For various sorts of concrete 1,20
7. Structure of concrete γ b7 0,90
8. Concrete structure made up of concrete of high intensity γ b8 0,3 + ω ≤ 1

within including coefficient γ b 7 Value ω
refer clause
6.2.2.3
9. Humidity of beehive concrete γ b9
+ 10% and less 1,00

+ greater than 25% 0,85
+ greater than 10% and less than or equal to 25% Linear
interpolation
10. Knot-chocked poured concrete joins assembled building γ b10
component when knot-joined width less than 1/5 dimension 1,15
of building component and less than 10 cm.
● When adding additional coefficient of working condition in case that include
specific loading capacity under the direction of equivalent standard, it takes γ b 2 = 1
(ex: it is loading capacity of earthquake);
54
TCXDVN 356: 2005
NOTE: 1. Coefficient of working condition:

+ Upon item 1, 2, 7, 9: it needs to be included in determining calculating intensity
R b and R bt ;
+ Upon item 4: it needs to be included in determining calculating intensity R bt ,ser ;
+ Upon other items: included only in determining R b .
2. For structure incurred by the action of repeated loading capacity, coefficient γ b 2 is
included in calculating upon durability, while γ b1 in calculating upon indisposed
durability and upon condition of crack formation.
3. When calculating structure incurred by loading capacity in the previous stage of
corresponding force, coefficient γ b 2 is excluded.
4. Coefficient’s coefficient of working condition included in calculating not
interdependent, but their product is not less than 0, 45.
Calculating intensities of concrete when counting along the second limit states Rb,ser
and Rbt ,ser leading into calculation, it need multiply with coefficient of working
condition γ bi = 1; except cases cited in clauses 7.1.2.9, 7.1.3.1, 7.1.3.2.
For sorts of light concrete, it allows using different values of calculating intensity
under the approval upon regulation.
It allows using above values for light concrete with definite reason.
NOTE: For values with durability degree of intermediate concrete as clause 5.1.1.3,
values given Tables 12, 13 and 17 take linear interpolation.
5.1.2.4 Concrete’s value of initial resilient module Eb in compression and pull taken as in
Table 17.
In case that there is figures about type of cement, concrete composition, production
condition, etc, it allow taking other values of Eb approved by appropriate authorities.
5.1.2.5 Coefficient of heat stretch α bt when temperature changing -40°C to 50°C, upon sorts
of concrete taken as followings:
 For heavy concrete, tiny-stone concrete and light concrete with condensed and steady
small core material: 1.10-5 oC-1;
 For light concrete using hollow small core material: 0,7.10-5 oC-1;
 For beehive concrete and hollow concrete: 0, 8.10-5 oC-1.
55
TCXDVN 356: 2005
In case that there is figure about mineral composition of core material, amount of
cement in hydrated degree of concrete, it allows take other values α bt under definite
reason and the approval of appropriate authorities.
5.1.2.6 Initial cross-stretch coefficient of concrete ν (Coefficient Po¸t-x«ng) is taken by 0, 2
for all sorts of concrete. Sliding module of concrete G take equal to 0, 4 matching
value Eb . Value of Eb is given in Table 17.
Table 16 – Coefficient on working condition of concrete γ b1 when structure

incurred by repeated loading capacity
Value γ b1 matching to non-symmetric coefficient

Humidity of of cycle ρ b
Sort of concrete
concrete
0 ÷ 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7
Natural humidity 0,75 0,80 0,85 0,90 0,95 1,00 1,00

1. Heavy concrete
Water saturation 0,50 0,60 0,70 0,80 0,90 0,95 1,00
Natural humidity 0,60 0,70 0,80 0,85 0,90 0,95 1,00
2. Light concrete
Water saturation 0,45 0,55 0,65 0,75 0,85 0,95 1,00
σ b, min
NOTE: In this table: ρ b = , with equivalent σ b, min , σ b, max is min & max pressure
σ b, max
of concrete in a changing cycle of loading capacity determined as indications in clause
6.3.1.
56
VIETNAM CONSTRUCTION STANDARD TCXDVN 356 :2005
Table 17 – Initial resillient module of concrete in compression and pull, Eb× 10-3, MPa
Compressed degree of durability and equivalent marks

Sort of concrete B1 B1,5 B2 B2,5 B3,5 B5 B7,5 B10 B12,5 B15 B20 B25 B30 B35 B40 B45 B50 B55 B6
M50 M75 M100 M150 M150 M200 M250 M350 M400 M450 M500 M600 M700 M700 M8
Heavy Natual – – – – 9,5 13,0 16,0 18,0 21,0 23,0 27,0 30,0 32,5 34,5 36,0 37,5 39,0 39,5 40
concrete solidifying
Heat fostering – – – – 8,5 11,5 14,5 16,0 19,0 20,5 24,0 27,0 29,0 31,0 32,5 34,0 35,0 35,5 36
in atmosphere
pressure
Pressure – – – – 7,0 9,88 12,0 13,5 16,0 17,0 20,0 22,5 24,5 26,0 27,0 28,0 29,0 29,5 30
distilling
Natual – – – – 7,0 10,0 13,5 15,5 17,5 19,5 22,0 24,0 26,0 27,5 28,5 — – – –
solidifying
Tiny- A Heat fostering – – – – 6,5 9,0 12,5 14,0 15,5 17,0 20,0 21,5 23,0 24,0 24,5 – – – –
stone
in atmosphere
concrete,
pressure
group
Natual – – – – 6,5 9,0 12,5 14,0 15,5 17,0 20,0 21,5 23,0 – – – – – –
B
solidifying
55
Heat fostering – – – – 5,5 8,0 11,5 13,0 14,5 15,5 17,5 19,0 20,5 – – – – – –
in atmosphere
pressure
Pressure – – – – – – – – – 16,5 18,0 19,5 21,0 22,0 23,0 23,5 24,0 24,5 25
C
distilling
Light D800 – – – 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 – – – – – – – – – – – –
concrete and D1000 – – – 5,0 5,5 6,3 7,2 8,0 8,4 – – – – – – – – – –
hollow
concrete, D1200 – – – 6,0 6,7 7,6 8,7 9,5 10,0 10,5 – – – – – – – – –
marked with D1400 – – – 7,0 7,8 8,8 10,0 11,0 11,7 12,5 13,5 14,5 15,5 – – – – – –
specific
D1600 – – – – 9,0 10,0 11,5 12,5 13,2 14,0 15,5 16,5 17,5 18,0 – – – – –
average
quantity D1800 – – – – – 11,2 13,0 14,0 14,7 15,5 17,0 18,5 19,5 20,5 21,0 – – – –
D2000 – – – – – – 14,5 16,0 17,0 18,0 19,5 21,0 22,0 23,0 23,5 – – – –
56
Table 17 – Initial resilient module of concrete in compression and pull, Eb× 10-3, MPa (ending)
Compressed degree of durability and equivalent mark

B B1, B B2, B3, B5 B7,5 B10 B12, B15 B20 B25 B30 B35 B40 B45 B50 B55 B60
Sort of concrete 1 5 2 5 5 5
M5 M7 M10 M15 M15 M20 M25 M35 M40 M45 M50 M60 M70 M70 M80
0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Light D500 1, 1,4 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
concrete 1
, D600 1, 1,7 1, 2,1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
beehive 4 8
concrete
in D700 – 1,9 2, 2,5 2,9 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
pressure 2
distillin D800 – – – 2,9 3,4 4,0 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
g,
D900 – – – – 3,8 4,5 5,5 – – – – – – – – – – – –
marked
with D100 – – – – – 5,0 6,0 7,0 – – – – – – – – – – –
specific 0
average D110 – – – – – – 6,8 7,9 8,3 8,6 – – – – – – – – –
quantity 0
D120 – – – – – – – 8,4 8,8 9,3 – – – – – – – – –
0
NOTE:
57
1. Classifying tiny-stone concrete into group, refer clause 5.1.1.3.

2. Sign M is to indicate mark of concrete on previous rule. Correlation amongst values about durability degree of conrete
and mark of concrete is given in Table A.1 and A.2, Appendix A in this criteria.
3. For light concrete, beehive concrete, and hollow concrete with its specific average quantity amongst intervals, take Eb
upon linear interpolation. For beehive concrete withou pressure distilling, value Eb is taken as concrete with pressure
distilling, then multiply with coefficient 0,8.
4. For self-pressure concrete, value Eb is taken as heavy concrete, then multiply with coefficient α = 0,56 + 0,006B, in
there B is compressed durability degree of concrete.
58
5.2 Steel Reinforcement

5.2.1 Clarify Steel reinforcement and areas of usage
5.2.1.1 All steels which are used for making reinforeced concrete strutures need to be
guaranteed based on the current technical requirements of the Government.
According to the TCVN (Vietnam standard) 1651:1985, there are Plain round
bar CI and streaked bar (vein steel reinforce) CII, CIII, CIV. According to
TCVN 3101:1979, there are low carbon cold-rolled thép các bon thấp kéo
nguội. According to TCVN 3100:1979, these are round bars used to make
front prepressed concrete.
In this standard, we can include some kinds of steel that are imported from
Rusia as below:
a) Steel bar/ reinforcing bar:
- Hot-rolled steel: Plain round bar group A-I, Deformed bar group A-II and
AC-II, A-III, A-IV, A-V, A-VI;
- Strengthen Deformed bar group AT-IIIC, AT-IV, AT-IVC, AT-IVK, AT-
VCK, AT-VI, AT-VIK and AT-VII
b) Wire steel:
 Cold-rolled wire steel:
+ Normal type: Deformed bar group Bp-I
+ High intensity bar: Plain round bar B-II, Deformed bar group Bp-
II.
 Cable steel:
+ Type 7 wire K-7; Type 19 wire K-19.
The reinforced concrete structure is allowed to use the Strengthening
Methodology by pulling the steel bar group A-IIIB in the industrial chain
(control the elongation and stress or only control the steel elongation). The
usage of new kind of steel needs the authorities’ approval.
NOTE:
59
1. Regarding Russian steels, the letter “C” presents its “weldability” (Ex: AT-
IIIC); The letter “K” presents its Protection against corrosion (Ex: AT-IVK);
the “T” is used in high intensity steel (Ex: AT-V). The letter “CK” is used In
case that the steel is required to be weldable and able to protect against
corrosion (Ex: AT-VCK). The “C” is used for special designations (Ex: AC-
II).
2. From now on, in regulations of steel usage, the order of steel groups
presents the priority when it is applied. EX: In 5.2.1.3 written: “Should use
the group CIII, A-III, AT-IIIC, AT-IVC, Bp-I, CI, A-I, CII, A-II and Ac-II of
tied or mesh frame of “reinforced concrete”. the order of usage will be:CIII,
then the next is AIII, AT-IIIC and...so on
To make ready details and connection plate, one needs to use hot-rolled plate
steel or steel form according to steel struture design standard TCXDVN 338 :
2005(VNConstruction Standard 338 : 2005).
Steel reinforcements which were produced based on other countries’ standard
(included in joint-venture companies) need to conform to technical
requirement of correlative standard and must show main technical targets as
following:
 Chemical component and producing methodology meet with requirement
of steel used in construction;
 The quota of intensity: flowing limit, durable limit and các chỉ tiêu về cường
độ: giới hạn chảy, giới hạn bền và displacement coefficient of those
limits;
 Elastic module, extreme stretching, flexible level;
 weldability;
 regarding structures that withstand high or low temperature, need to know
changing of mechanical nature when increase or decrease in
temperature;
 Need to know fatigued limit regarding to iterative loading capacity
structure.
60
Note: Regarding steel reinforcement that is not meet with Vietnam standard is
needed to based on a mechanical quota to convert to correlative steel
reinforcement when choosing their usage, (refer to Appendix B).
5.2.1.2 It depends on the kind of structure to choose prestressed or non-prestressed
steel reinforcement as well as execute working condition, usage of house and
work according to direction in articles from 5.2.1.3 to 5.2.1.8 and
consideration of steel reinforcement unity in use for group structure and
diameter, so on...
5.2.1.3 The steels below are used to make the Non-prestressed reinforcement (normal
reinforcement) for the reinforced concrete:
a) Steel bar group AT-IVC: Used to make longitudinal reinforcement
b) Steel bar group CIII, A-III and AT-IIIC: used to make longitudinal
reinforcement and transverse reinforcement.
c) The wire steel group Bp-I: is used to make longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement
d) Steel bar group CI, A-I, CII, A-II and Ac-II: are used to make transverse as
well as longitudinal reinforcement (if not able to use the normal kind of
steel)
e) Steel bar group CIV, A-IV (A-IV, AT-IV, AT-IVK): are used to make
longitudinal reinforcement in the tied and mesh frame.
f) Steel bar group A-V (A-V, AT-V, AT-VK, AT-VCK), A-VI (A-VI, AT-
VI, AT-VIK), AT-VII: are used to make compression and tension
longitudinal reinforcement in using the Non-prestressed and prestressed
reinforcement situation in tied
To prevent the steel from being prestressed, the steel in reinforcement group
A-IIIB is allowed to tension the longitudinal reinforcement in the tied and
mesh frame
Steel reinforcement group CIII, A-III, AT-IIIC, AT-IVC, Bp-I, CI, A-I, CII,
A-II and Ac-II should be used in the tied and mesh frame.
61
Steel reinforcement groups A-IIIB, AT-IVK (made by steel label 10MnSi2,

08Mn2Si) and AT-V (made by steel label 20MnSi) are allowed in cross
unions by point welding, (refer to article 8.8.1) to make mesh and welded
frame.
5.2.1.4 One should use steel bar group CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII, A-III and AT-IIIC and
wire steel group Bp-I in structures that use normal reinforcement,
withstanding air pressure, liquid and serapated material.
5.2.1.5 To make the prestressed reinforcement for the reinforced concrete, one needs
to use the steels following:
g) Steel bar / reinforcing bar group A-V (A-V, AT-V, AT-VK, AT-VCK), A-
VI (A-VI, AT-VI, AT-VIK) and AT-VII;
h) Wire steel group B-II, Bp-II; and cable steel K-7 and K-19.
One is allowed to use steel bar group CIV, A-IV (A-IV, AT-IV, AT-IVC,
AT-IVK) and A-IIIB to make the prestressed reinforcement.
Steel bar group AT-VII, AT-VI and AT-V should be used in structures that
are not longer than 12m.
NOTE: Steel bar below: CIV, A-IV (A-IV, AT-IV, AT-IVC, AT-IVK) and
A-IIIB should be used to make prestressed reinforcement for front prestressed
concrete structures which are made by light concrete level B7.5 to B12.5.
5.2.1.6 One should use the sort of steels listed below to make prestressed
reinforcement for the structures that can stand with withstand the air pressure,
liquid and separated material:
i) steel group B-II, Bp-I and cable steel K-7 and K-19;
j) Steel bar group A-V (A-V, AT-V, AT-VK, AT-VCK), A-VI (A-VI, AT-
VI, AT-VIK) and AT-VII;
k) Steel bar group CIV, A-IV (A-IV, AT-IV, AT-IVK, AT-IVC).
It is also allowed to use steel group A-IIIB in the structures above.
Steel group A-IIIB is allowed in the structures above.
62
Steel group CIV, A-IV as well as group AT-VIK, AT-VK, AT-VCK and AT-
IVK should be used as a priority to make prestressed reinforcement in
strongly eroding environments.
5.2.1.7 When choose category and label of steel to make steel reinforcement base on
calculating as well as choosing rolled steel fixing for laid details, needs to
mention the used temperature condition of the structure and load-bearing
character as requirement in appendix A and B.
5.2.1.8 Regarding winch hook of concrete package and reinforced concrete put
together, one needs to use hot-rolled steel group Ac-II label 10MnTi and
group CI, A-I label CT3ủù2.
5.2.1.9 In this standard, from now on, when it is not necessary to point out exactly
what kind of steel bar (hot-rolled steel, Heat treatment). The group symbol of
steel will use symbol of hot-rolled steel (ex: group A-V is understood as group
A-V, AT-V, AT-VK and AT-VCK).
5.2.2 Standard characteristic and calculating characteristic of steel
reinforcement
5.2.2.1 Standard Intensity of steel reinforcement Rsn is the smallest validity that is
controlled of the practical flowing limit or convention (equal with stress
corresponding to deformation surplus is 0.2%).
The controlled characteristic of steel mentioned above is based on the current
standards of the Government and technical conditions of steel reinforcement
to guarantee probability not less than 95%.
Standard intensity Rsn of some kinds of steel bar and wire steel are in table 18
and 19; refer to appendix B for other kinds of steel.
Table 18 – standard tension intensity Rsn and calculating tension

intensity of steel bar in calculate in second limited state Rs,ser
Steel bar group Value Rsn and Rs ,ser , MPa
CI, A-I 235

CII, A-II 295
63
CIII, A-III 390

CIV, A-IV 590
A-V 788
A-VI 980
AT-VII 1175
A-IIIB 540
Note: Symbol of steel group is base on articles 5.2.1.1
and 5.2.1.9.
Table 19 - Tension intensity standard Rsn and calculating tension intensity of

wire steel in second limited state Rs ,ser
Wire steel Durable Diameter, Value Rsn and

group degree/level mm Rs ,ser , MPa
Bp-I – 3; 4; 5 490
1,500 3 1,500
1,400 4; 5 1,400
B-II 1,300 6 1,300
1,200 7 1,200
1,100 8 1,100
1,500 3 1,500
1,400 4; 5 1,400
Bp-II 1,200 6 1,200
1,100 7 1,100
1,000 8 1,000
1,500 6; 9; 12 1,500
K-7
1,400 15 1,400
K-19 1,500 14 1,500
NOTE: 1. Durable degree/level of wire steel is the value of convention
running limit, measured by MPa.
2. Đ Regarding wire steel group B-II; Bp-II, K-7 and K-19, its durable
64
degree is shown clearly in the symbol, ex:

– Symbol of wire steel group B-II with a diameter of 3mm:
φ3B1500
– Symbol of wire steel group B-II with a diameter of 5mm:
φ5Bp1400
– Symbol of cable steel group K-7 with a diameter of 12 mm:
φ12K7-1500
5.2.2.2 The calculating tension intensity R s of steel reinforcement is calculated in

accordance with the first and second limited states. This is determined via the
formula below:
R sn
Rs = (10)
γs
γ s – Steel reinforcement trusted coefficient is based on Table 20. Refer to

appendix B for other grades of steels.
Table 20 - Trusted coefficient of steel reinforcement γ s
Value γ s when calculating the

structure according to limited
Steel bar group state
First Second
Steel bar CI, A-I, CII, A-II 1.05 1.00
CIII, A-III has 6÷8 1.10 1.00

diameter, mm 10 ÷ 40 1.07 1.00
CIV, A-IV, A-V 1.15 1.00
A-VI, AT-VII 1.20 1.00
Elongation and
A-IIIB
stress are controlled 1.10 1.00
65
Elongation is
1.20 1.00
controlled only
Wire Bp-I 1.20 1.00
steel
B-II, Bp-II 1.20 1.00
Cable
K-7, K-19 1.20 1.00
steel
NOTE: Symbol of steel group is based on article 5.2.1.1 and 5.2.1.9.
5.2.2.3 Compression Intensity of Steel Reinforcement Rsc is used when calculating the
structure according to the first limited states when reinforced concrete and steel
reinforcement do not correlate based on table 21 and table 22.
When calculating the compression stage before the structure, the value of
Rsc should not be higher than 330 MPa, nor lower than 170 MPa with steel
group A-IIIB.
When reinforced concrete and steel reinforcement do not correlate, use Rsc =
0.
5.2.2.4 The calculating intensity of steel reinforcement when calculated according to
the first limited states are decreased (or increased) by multiplying the working
condition Coefficient of steel reinforcement γ si . This Coefficient takes into
account the dangers caused by fatigue, irregular stress distribution in the
section, anchor condition, intensity of concrete that surrounding steel
reinforcement, ect... or when steel reinforcement works on the condition that
the stress is greater than the convention flowing limit, the change in steel
character which produces the condition, ect...., according to the first and
second limited states
The calculating intensity of steel reinforcement when calculated according to
the second limited states Rs ,ser are brought in when calculating with the
working condition coefficient γ si =1,0.
Table 21 - Calculating intensity of steel bar when calculated according to

the first limited states.
Steel bar group Tension intensity, MPa Compression
66
longitudina transverse intensity

l reinforcement Rsc
reinforcem (stirrup, inclined
ent bar)
Rs Rsw
CI, A-I 225 175 225

CII, A-II 280 225 280
A-III diameter, mm 6÷8 355 285* 355
CIII, A-III diameter
10 ÷ 40 365 290* 365
mm
CIV, A-IV 510 405 450**
A-V 680 545 500**
A-VI 815 650 500**
AT-VII 980 785 500**
Elongation
and stress
490 390 200
are
A-IIIB controlled
Elongation
is controlled 450 360 200
only
In a welded steel frame, usage of steel group CIII, A-III which has a diameter smaller
than 1/3 of diameter of longitudinal reinforcement, then value Rsw = 255 MPa.
The values Rsc which are mentioned above are used for structures that are made by
heavy concrete, small seed/pip/??? concrete, light concrete in calculating the loading
capacities based on article 2a in Table 15; And the value Rsc = 400 MPa in these
loading capacities. Regarding structures that are made by bee-hive concrete and
hollow concrete, take Rsc = 400 Mpa in every state.
NOTE:
67
In every state, because of some reasons, if non-prestressed reinforcement group CIII,

A-III and up is used to make transverse reinforcement (stirrup, inclined bar), value of
calculating intensity R sw is the same steel group CIII, A-III.
Steel group symbols are in articles 5.2.1.1 and 5.2.1.9.
Calculating intensity of transverse reinforcement (stirrup, inclined bar) Rsw is

decreased compare to Rs by multiplying with working condition coefficients
γ s1 and γ s 2 . These coefficients are below:
l) Regardless of the kind and label of steel: use γ s1 = 0,8 ( γ s1 mentions
irregular stress distribution in steel reinforcement);
m) Regarding the steel bar group CIII, A-III with a diameter less than 1/3
diameter of longitudinal reinforcement and wire steel group Bp-I in a
welded steel frame: γ s 2 = 0,9 ( γ s 2 mentions possibility that the welded
union is destroyed due to crushing).
Table 22 – Calculated strength of steel when calculate according to first

limited condition, MPa
Cường độ chịu kéo tính toán

Calculated
Types of wire Diameter, Vertical steel Horizontal pressure
steel mm Rs steel (stirrup, strength
inclined bar) Rsc
Rsw
Bp-I 3; 4; 5 410 290* 375**

B-II has solid
level
1500 3 1250 1000
1400 4; 5 1170 940
1300 6 1050 835 500**
1200 7 1000 785
1100 8 915 730
Bp-II has solid
level
1500 3 1250 1000
68
1400 4; 5 1170 940

1200 6 1000 785
1100 7 915 730
1000 8 850 680
K-7 has solid
level
1500 6; 9; 12 1250 1000
1400 15 1160 945
K-19 14 1250 1000
The value Rsw needs to be equal to 325 Mpa when wire steel is used in the
tied steel frame.
The value Rsc metioned earlier is taken when calculating a structure that is
made by heavy concrete, small bead concrete, light concrete withstanding
loading capacities based on Table 15 article 2a; Rsc = 400 MPa when
calculating structures to withstand loading capacities based on Table 15
article 2b as well as when calculating structures which are made by hollow
and bee-hive concrete to withstand any kind of loading capacities, value
Rsc = 340 Mpa for wire steel Bp-I, = 400 Mpa for B-II, Bp-II, K-7 and K-19
Calculating tension intensity of transverse reinforcement (stirrup, inclined bar)

Rsw mentioned working condition coefficient γ s1 and γ s 2 in Table 21 and 22.
Besides, Calculating intensities R s , Rsc , Rsw need to be multiplied with

working condition coefficients of steel reinforcement in correlative states.
These coefficients are provided in Table from 23 to 26.
69
Table 23 - Working condition coefficients of steel reinforcement γ si

Needed factors of Values γ si
working
Steel Steel
condition
reinforcement reinforcement
coefficients of Symbol Value
character group
steel
reinforcement
1. Shear force Transverse All groups of γ s1 Article 5.2.2.4

reinforcement reinforcement reinforcement
2. There are Transverse CIII, A-III; γ s2 Article 5.2.2.4
welded reinforcement BP-I
connections when
withstanding shear
force
3. Iterative loading Longitudinal All groups of Table 24
capacity and transverse reinforcement γ s3
reinforcement
4. There are Longitudinal CI, A-I, CII, γ s4 Table 25

welded and transverse A-II, CIII,
connections when reinforcement A-III, CIV,
withstanding when there is A-IV; A-V
Iterative loading welding union
capacity
5. Stress Prestressed γ s5 In there lx – distance
transmitting part longitudinal lx l p from the stress
to non-anchoring reinforcement transmit part to
reinforcement and calculating section;
anchoring part of All groups of
Non- lx l an The correlative l p , lan
Non-prestressed reinforcement
prestressed is the length of the
reinforcement
longitudinal stress transmitting part
reinforcement and steel reinforced
anchor area (Article
5.2.2.5 and 8.5.2)
70
6. Tension CIV, A-IV;

High intensity longitudinal A-V; A-VI;
reinforcement reinforcement AT-VII; B-II;
works in stress K-7; K-19
γ s6 Article 6.2.2.4
condition greater
than the
convention
flowing limit
7. Transverse
Light concrete reinforcement
CI, A-I; BP-I γ s7 0,8
Component level
B7.5 and lower.
8. Compression γ s8 190 + 40 B
≤1
longitudinal R sc
Bee-hive concrete
Component level reinforcement
B7.5 and lower. All groups of
reinforcement
Transverse 25 B
≤1
reinforcement R sw
9. Compression All groups of

Reinforcement longitudinal reinforcement
protection cover in reinforcement γ s9 Table 26
bee-hive concrete
component
NOTE: 1. The coefficients γ s3 and γ s 4 according to article 3 and 4 in this table are only
mentioned when calculating fatigue; These coefficients are mentioned concomitantly/at
the same time for steel reinforcement which has a welded union.
2. The coefficients γ s5 according to article 5 in this table is used for both calculating
intensity R s and front stress in steel reinforcement σ sp .
3. The vaule Rsc and Rsw in the formulas of article 8 of this table are counted by MPa;
value B (compressed durable level of reinforced concrete, MPa ) according to article
5.1.1.2.
71
Table 24 - Working condition coefficient of steel reinforcement γ s3 when

structure withstands i, the Iterative loading capacity
Value γ s3
Value γ s3 corresponds to the Non-
symmetrical coefficient of cycle ρ s
Group of reinforcement
– –
0 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
1.0 0.2
CI, A-I 0.41 0.63 0.70 0.77 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
CII, A-II 0.42 0.51 0.55 0.60 0.69 0.93 1.00 1.00 1.00
A-III has
6÷8 0.33 0.38 0.42 0.47 0.57 0.85 0.95 1.00 1.00
diameter, mm
CIII, A-III has
10 ÷ 40 0.31 0.36 0.40 0.45 0.55 0.81 0.91 0.95 1.00
diameter, mm
CIV, A-IV – – – – 0.38 0.72 0.91 0.96 1.00
A-V – – – – 0.27 0.55 0.69 0.87 1.00
A-VI – – – – 0.19 0.53 0.67 0.87 1.00
AT VII – – – – 0.15 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00

AT-II – – – – – 0.67 0.82 0.91 1.00
B-II – – – – – 0.77 0.97 1.00 1.00
K-7 6÷9 – – – – – 0.77 0.92 1.00 1.00
Has diameter,
mm 12 ÷ 15 – – – – – 0.68 0.84 1.00 1.00
K-19, Has diameter 14 mm – – – – – 0.63 0.77 0.96 1.00

Bp-I – – 0.56 0.71 0.85 0.94 1.00 1.00 1.00
Elongation
and stress are – – – – 0.41 0.66 0.84 1.00 1.00
A-IIIs controlled
Only stress is
– – – – 0.46 0.73 0.93 1.00 1.00
checked
72
NOTE:
σ s,min
1. ρ s = , in there, correlative σ s,min , σ s,max – is the smallest and greatest
σ s,max
stress in steel reinforcement in a cycle of changing load capacity,
determined based on article 6.3.1.
2. When calculating the bending component that is made by heavy concrete
and non-prestressed reinforcement, the elongation reinforcement is:
+ When 0 ≤ M min ≤ 0,20 ρ s = 0,30;
M max
+ When 0,20 < M min ≤ 0,75 ρ s = 0,15 + 0,8

M min
;
M max M max
+ When Mmin > 0,75 ρs =

Mmin
,
Mmax Mmax
In there, correlative M min , M max is the smallest and the greatest curved
moment at the calculating section in a changing cycle of loading capacity.
3. One is not allowed to use correlative steel reinforcement if there is no
value for γ s 3 and is correlative with the values of ρ s in the table.
Table 25 – Working condition coefficient of steel reinforcement γ s 4
When the loading capacity structure

Welding reiterates with unsymmetric coefficient of
Steel
union cycle ρ s
reinforcement
group
group 0 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
1 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

CI, A-I 2 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00
CII, A-II 3 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.50 0.65 0.85 1.00
4 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.45 0.65 1.00
1 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
CIII, A-III
2 0.60 0.65 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.85 1.00
73
3 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.80 1.00

4 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.60 1.00
1 – – 0.95 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.00
CIV, A-IV 2 – – 0.75 0.75 0.80 0.90 1,00
3 – – 0.30 0.35 0.55 0.70 1.00
1 – – 0.95 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.00
A-V
2 – – 0.75 0.75 0.80 0.90 1.00
Hot-rolled
3 – – 0.35 0.40 0.50 0.70 1.00
NOTE:
1. Groups of welding union mentioned in this table included:
+ Group 1 – Facing welding union of steel bars (A-II, CII, A-III, CIII, A-
IV, CIV, A-V) that have the same diameter and mechanical process
before or after being welded.
+ Group 2 - Two steel bars are united / connected to each other as a cross
by a contact weld; Facing welding union of 2 steel bars (A-I, CI, A-II,
CII, A-III, CIII) that have the same diameter and are beveled
+ Group 3 - Welding union of 3 steel bars (A-IIIC) stacked up (3 layers)
as cross by a contact weld; Facing welding union of 2 steel bars (A-III,
CIII) grafted to each other; Facing welded union of 2 steel bars which
have a steel spout; welding union of 2 steel bars (A-I, CI, A-II, CII, A-
III, CIII, A-IV, CIV, A-V) by 2 lengths of steel bars connect with weld
line on the whole connected steel bar; T- welding union of steel bar and
steel plate by contact welding.
+ Group 4 - Stacked bar welding union (A-I, CI, A-II, CII, A-III, CIII)
and steel plate by contact welding, arc welding; T- welding union of
steel bar by arc welding and without auxiliary metal.
2. The value γ s 4 is provided for steel reinforcement 20mm diameter in the
table
3.Value of γ s 4 coefficient needs to be reduced down 5% when diameter
of steel bar is 22mm to 32mm; and reduced 10% when diameter is greater
than 32mm.
74
Table 26 – Working condition coefficient γ s 9 of steel reinforcement
Value γ s 9 of steel
reinforcement
Protection layer Plain
Deformed
round
bar
bar
1. Polistirol cement, mineral
1.0 1.0
paint
2. Bitumen (cold) ≥ 6 mm 0.7 1.0
cement when steel
reinforcement < 6 mm 0.7 0.7
diameter
3. Bitumen- silicate (hot) 0.7 0.7
4. Bitumen- clay 0.5 0.7
5. Bitumen schist, cement 0.5 0.5
5.2.2.5 The length of stress transmitting part l p of tension reinforcement without
⎛ σ sp ⎞
anchor is determined by the formula: l p = ⎜ ω p + λ p ⎟d (11)
⎜ Rbp ⎟
⎝ ⎠
In there ω p and λ p are from table 27.
If necessary, value Rbp needs to be multiplied with working condition

coefficients of reinforced concrete except γ b 2 .
Value σ sp in formula (11) is equal to:
 The Greater value between two values Rs and σ sp when calculated based
on the durable level.
75
 Value σ sp when calculating the building component based on anti-

cracking possibility. In this, σ sp is counted stress waste according to
formulas from 1 to 5 in table 6.
In components that are made by small bead concrete group B and light
concrete with hollow material (except concrete level B7.5 to B12.5), increase
value ω p and λ p higher 1.2 time compare to value for Table 27.
In cases when the front stress is transmitted suddenly into concrete, the value
ω p and λ p is taken higher 1.25 times regarding to deformed bar. It is not
allowed to transmit frontal compressed stress suddenly when using steel bar
with a diameter is greater than 18 mm.
The value l p is not less than 15d regarding to all groups of deformed steel
bar.
Regarding wire steel, the beginning point of the stress transmitting section in
the case of transmitting compressed stress suddenly into concrete, is a
distance of 0.25 l p from the beginning of the component, (except high
intensity wire steel group Bp-II which has anchors in inside of the slot
section).
Table 27 – Coefficients to determine the length of stress transmitting

section l p of unanchored prestressed reinforcement
Kind and steel Diameter Coefficients

reinforcement group mm ωp λp
1. Deformed Doesn’t depend on

reinforcement diameter 0.25 10
(All groups of)
2. Deformed high intensity 5 1.40 40
wire reinforcement group 4 1.40 50
Вр-II
3 1.40 60
3. Cable К-7 15 1.00 25
76
reinforcem 12 1.10 25
ent 9 1.25 30
6 1.40 40
К-19 14 1.00 25
NOTE: Regarding components of light concrete from level B7.5 to
B12.5, the values ω p and λ p are raised by 1.4 times compared to the
correlative values in this table.
5.2.2.6 Value of elastic module E s of some steel reinforcements in Table 28.
Table 28 - Elastic module of various kinds of steel reinforcement.
Steel reinforcement group E s ⋅ 10 −4 , MPa
CI, А-I, CII, А-II 21

CIII, А-III 20
CIV, А-IV, А-V, А-VI and Ат-
19
VII
А-IIIв 18
В-II, Вр-II 20
К-7, К-19 18
Вр-I 17
6. Calculating concrete component, reinforcement concrete based on limited

conditions
6.1 Calculating concrete component based on durability.

6.1.1 General principle
6.1.1.1 Calculating concrete component based on durability is needed to be carried
out in sections that are perpendicular with a longitudinal Pedal fulcrum
component. Depending on the working condition of the component to
calculate the related working of tension section or not.
6.1.1.2 Regarding the offset compressed components which the limited state
provided in article 4.1.7a is specific by sabotage of compressed concrete,
77
working of tension concrete will not be related when calculated. Compressed

durablity of concrete is agreed that the value of compressed stressed concrete
is even R b and distributed evenly in compressed areas of the section –
Convention compressed area (Picture 2) calls for a short compressed area of
concrete.
Rb Ab
N
x
Rb Ab
y
h
Träng t©m
tiÕt diÖn
b
Picture 2 – Internal force outline and stress chart on

perpendicular section with component longitudinal Pedal
fulcrum of offset compressed concrete when calculating
durability without working of concrete in tension area.
6.1.1.3 Regarding components in article 4.1.7b as well as components that are not
allowed to be cracked in structures using condition (water pressure
component, roof, partition, so on…) relates working of concrete in tension
area when calculating. At that time, limited state is specified by sabotage of
concrete in the tension area (appearance of a crack slit). Critical force is
determined based on the following supposition (Picture 3):
 Component is still considered flat after being deformed.
 The greatest relative stretch degree of outer tension concrete is eqaul to
2 R bt Eb ;
 Stress inside concrete in compressed area is determined by elastic

deforming of concrete (in some cases, it included inelastic deforming)
 Stress of concrete is tension area is distributed steadily and equal to R bt ;
6.1.1.4 When there is a possibility to take from a slanting crack (ex: component with
I, T section withstanding shearing force), need to calculate component of
concrete according to conditions (144) and (145), in there calculating
78
intensity of concrete when calculated based on the second limited states R b,ser
and R bt ,ser is replaced by values correlating to calculating intensity when
calculated based on the first limited states R b và R bt ;
6.1.1.5 The component which is needed to be calculated to withstand the local effect
of loading capacity in article 6.2.5.1.
N Ab
x
h
Abt
R bt
b
2R bt
Picture 3 – Internal force outline and stress chart on perpendicular

section with component longitudinal Pedal fulcrum of bent
concrete (offset compressed concrete) is measured based on
durability, relating to the working of concrete in the tension area.
6.1.2 Calculating of offset compressed concrete component

6.1.2.1 When Calculating the offset compressed concrete component, one needs to
count the contingent offset declination ea of longitudinal force. Value ea is
determined based on article 4.2.12.
6.1.2.2 With the thin level component l0 i > 14 , one needs to consider the affect of
bending in the offset flat of longitudinal force and in perpendicular flat
withstanding the force capacity of components by multiplying the value of e0
with coefficient η (refer to article 6.1.2.5). In case of calculating the offset flat
of longitudinal force, value e0 is taken by contingent offset declination ea .
One is not allowed to use the offset compressed concrete component (except
in the cases that are mentioned in article 4.1.7b) when offset declination of
the place where longitudinal force includes longitudinal bending e0η over:
a) According to loading capacity combination:
79
 basic: ........................................................................................................... 0.90y

 special: ........................................................................................................ 0.95y
b) According to kind and level of concrete:
 regarding heavy concrete, small bead concrete and light concrete that has a
level greater than B7.5: ............................................................................. y–10
 regarding other concrete and level of cncrete: ............................................ y–20
(in here, y is distance from central section to the concrete that is compressed
more, measured in mm).
6.1.2.3 Regarding the offset compressed concrete components mentioned in 8.11.2,

need to put composition reiforceed concrete.
6.1.2.4 The offset compressed concrete components (Picture 2) needs to be calculated
according to condition :
N ≤ αR b Ab (12)
Ab is the compressed region of concrete which is determined from the central

condition of the compressed region which is the same as applying external
forces union.
Regarding the rectangle component, Ab is determined based on the formula:
⎛ 2e η ⎞
Ab = bh ⎜ 1 − 0 ⎟ (13)
⎝ h ⎠
Regarding the offset compressed concrete components that are not allowed to
crack according to the using condition, beside calculating based on condition
(12), one needs to check the condition (14) related to the working of tension
regional concrete (refer to article 6.1.1, picture 3):
α R bt W pl
N ≤ (14)
e0 η − r
The rectangle component condition (14) has form:
80
1 , 75 α R bt bh (15)
N ≤
6e0 η
−ϕ
h
Calculation of offset compressed concrete components in article 4.1.7b needs

to be carried out according to conditions (14) and (15)
In formulas from (12) to (15):
η – coefficient, determined based on formula (19);
α – coefficient, is taken as following:
+ Heavy concrete, small bead concrete, light concrete, hollow

concrete: .......................................................................................... 1.00
+ bee-hive concrete which is chưng áp: ............................................. 0.85
+ bee-hive concrete which is not chưng áp: ....................................... 0.75
W pl – moment against bending of section to outer tension part relates to
inelastic deformation of tension concrete, determined based on formula (16)
with supposition without longitudinal force:
2 Ib0
W pl = + Sb0 (16)
h− x
r – distance from central section to the core point of the furthest section away
from the tension area region, determined by formula:
W
r =ϕ (17)
A
ϕ – refer to acticle 7.1.2.4;
Neutralized Axis position is determined by condition:
S 'b 0 =
(h − x ) Abt (18)
2
6.1.2.5 Coefficient value η considers influence of flexure to offset declination e0 of

longitudinal force, determined by the formula:
1
η = (19)
N
1−
N cr
81
In there Ncr – critical force convention is determined based on formula:
6,4 E b I ⎛ 0,11 ⎞
N cr = ⎜⎜ + 0 ,1 ⎟⎟ (20)
ϕ l l02 ⎝ 0,1 + δ e ⎠
In formula (20):
ϕ l – coefficient relates to influence of long-term effect of loading capacity to
flexure of component in limited state is equal to:
Ml
ϕl = 1 + β (21)
M
But not greater than 1 + β ;
In there:
β – coefficient is dependant on the kind of concrete, according to Table
29;
M – moment of tension or compression boundary is less than all sections
due to the regular loading capacity effect, long-term temporary
loading capacity and short-term temporary loading capacity;
Ml – similar M , but by regular loading capacity and long-term temporary
loading capacity;
l0 – determined based on Table 30;
δe – coefficient, is used by e0 h , but not less than δ e,min :
l0
δ e , min = 0,5 − 0,01 − 0,01Rb (22)
h
In here: Rb – counted by MPa.
If bending moment (or offset declination) by all loading capacity and sum of
regular loading capacity effect, long-term temporary loading capacity have
different signs from each other then ϕ l is used as following:
when absolute the value of offset declination due to all loading capacity is e0 > 0,1h :
ϕl = 1 ;
82
e0
when e0 ≤ 0,1h : ϕl = ϕl1 + 10 (1 − ϕl1 ) ,
h
in there:
ϕl 1 – is determined based on formula (21) where M is taken by
longitudinal force N (caused by regular, long-term, short-term
temporary loading capacity effect) multiplied by the distance from the
central section to the least tension or compressed side due to regular
and long-term temporary loading capacity effect.
Table 29 - Coefficient β in formula (21)
Kind of concrete Value of β
1. Heavy concrete 1.0

2. Small bead concrete group:
2 A 1.3
3 B 1.5
4 C 1.0
3. Light concrete that has :
5 Solid artificial material 1.0
6 Spongy artificial material 1.5
7 Natural material 2.5
4. Hollow concrete 2.0
5. Bee-hive concrete:
8 Stew press : chung ap 1.3
9 Doent stew press khong chung 1.5
ap
NOTE: Small bead concrete is clarified base on article 5.1.1.3.
83
Table 30 – Calculating length l0 of offset compressed concrete

components
Specific associate between wall and post Value l0
1. There is a cushion above and below

a) lean against joints in two ends H
b) When dovetail halving one end and the other one is able to
move, regarding to house: 1.25H
4 Many spans 1.50H
5 One span 2.00H
2. Stand freely
NOTE: H - height of post (or wall) among floors that is minus the thickness
of the floor and the height of free standing structure.
6.1.2.6 Calculations of local compressed concrete components are needed to be

carried out in accordance with article 6.2.5.1 and 6.2.5.2.
6.1.3 Flexure component
6.1.3.1 Flexure component (Picture 3) is needed to be calculated based on conditions:
M ≤ α Rbt W pl (23)
In there:
α – coefficient, based on artical 6.1.2.4;
Wpl – determined by formula (16), regarding the rectangle component, Wpl
is equal to:
bh 2 (24)
W pl =
3,5
6.2 Calculation of the reinforced concrete component based on durability

6.2.1 General priciple
6.2.1.1 Reinforced concrete component needs to be calculated based on the
perpendicular section with component longitudinal Pedal fulcrum and incline
section compared to the component longitudinal Pedal fulcrum following the
84
most dangerous direction. When there is a twisted moment that needs to be

checked, the section durability limited by twisted cracks in the tension region
follow the most possible dangerous direction. Additionally, one needs to
calculate the component to withstand the local effect of loading capacity(local
compression, holed compression, break pull).
6.2.1.2 When tension concrete does not adhere, durable structure calculation will
based on particular direction.
6.2.2 Calculation of perpendicular sections with component longitudinal Pedal
fulcrum
6.2.2.1 Critical internal force on perpendicular sections need to be determined from
the following suppositions:
• Skip tension ability of concrete;
• Compressed ability of concrete in stress, taken even R b , is distributed regularly in
the compressed region;
• Deformation (stress) in concrete is determined based on the height of the
compressed region of concrete and relates to deformation (stress) due to prestress
(refer to article 6.2.2.19);
• Tension stress in concrete is not greater than the calculating tension intensity R s ;
• Compressed stress in concrete is not greater than calculating the compressed

intensity R sc .
6.2.2.2 When an external force effects the flat and goes through the symmetric pedal
fulcrum of the section and steel reinforcement is put together with the
perpendicular side of the flat, the calculation of the perpendicular section with
the component longitudinal Pedal fulcrum is carried out depending on the
correlation between the value of the relative height of compressed region of
concrete ξ = x h0 , is determined from the correlative balance conditions and
relative height in compressed regions of concrete ξ R (refer to article 6.2.2.3),
at the period of time when the limited state of component happens
concurrently with stress in tension concrete reaches to calculating intensity
85
R s , relates to correlative working condition coefficients, except coefficient

γ s 6 (refer to article 6.2.2.4).
6.2.2.3 Value ξ R is determined based on the formula:

ω (25)
ξR =
σ ⎛ ω ⎞
1 + sR ⎜ 1 − ⎟
σ sc , u ⎝ 1,1 ⎠
In there:
ω – compressed concrete specific is determined based on formula:
ω = α − 0 ,008 Rb (26)
In here:
α – coefficient is taken as the following:
 ...............................................................................................
regarding to heavy concrete: ................................................ 0.85
 ...............................................................................................
regarding to small bead concrete (refer to article 5.1.1.3) group
A: .......................................................................................... 0.80
 ...............................................................................................
regarding to small bead concrete group B, C: ...................... 0.75
 ...............................................................................................
regarding to light, bee-hive and hollow concrete: ................ 0.80
Regarding to boiled pressure concrete (heavy concrete, light
concrete, hollow concrete), coefficient α is decreased 0.05;
R b – calculated by MPa;
σ sR – stress in steel reinforcement (MPa), regarding to steel reinforcement

that:
+ Has practical flowing limit: CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII, A-III, A-IIIB,
Bp-I:
σ sR = R s − σ sp ;
86
 Has convention flowing limit: CIV, A-IV, A-V, A-VI and AT-
VII:
σ sR = R s + 400 − σ sp − Δσ sp ;
 Wire and cable high intensity : B-II, Bp-II, K–7, K–19:

σ sR = R s + 400 − σ sp , (at that time Δσ sp = 0 );
In here:
R s – calculating tension intensity relates to correlative working
condition coefficients γ si , except γ s 6 (refer to article 6.2.2.4);
σ sp – is taken with γ sp < 1 ;
Δσ sp – refer to article 6.2.2.19;
σ sc ,u – limited stress of the steel reinforcement in compressed region is taken

as folowing:
a. Regarding components made from heavy concrete, small bead concrete,
light concrete depend on factors in Table 15:
 With a loading capacity effect such as in item 2a: ..........................500 MPa
 With loading capacity effects such as in item 2b: ...........................400 MPa
b. Regarding components made from hollow and bee-hive concrete, loading
capacity is 400 MPa for every case. When calculating structures in the pre-
compressed stage value σ sc,u = 330 MPa.
value ξ R is determined based on formula (25), regarding components that are

made from bee-hive concrete need to be smaller than 0.6..
6.2.2.4 When calculating according to durability of reinforced concrete, the
component used by high intensity steel reinforcement (has convention
flowing limit) group CIV, A-IV, A-V, A-VI, AT-VII, B-II, K-7 and K-19,
when conforming to condition ξ < ξ R , tension intensity of steel
reinforcement R s needs to be multiplied with the coefficient γ s 6 (refer to
article 6 table 23) determined by the formula:
87
⎛ ξ ⎞
γ s6 = η − (η −1) ⎜⎜ 2−1⎟⎟ ≤ η (27)
⎝ ξR ⎠
In there:
η – coefficient, is taken regarding to steel reinforcement group:
 CIV, A-IV: ...................................................... 1.20

 A-V, B-II, Bp-II, K-7, K-19: ......................... 1.15
 A-VI, AT -VII: ............................................... 1.10
Regarding to the central tension as well as offset cases by longitudinal force
put in the middle of combined forces in steel reinforcement, value γ s 6 is
taken even η .
When a welded connection is in a component region where the bending

moment is over 0,9 M max ( M max is the largest calculating moment), value of
coefficient γ s 6 is not greater than 1.1 regarding the steel reinforcement group
CIV, A-IV, A-V, and not greater than 1.05 for group AT-VII.
Coefficient γ s 6 does not relate to components that:
6 Are calculated to withstand iterative loading capacity;

7 Are arranged steel reinforcement by high intensity wire steels put close to each
oher (does not have slit);
8 Are used in eroded environment.
6.2.2.5 In regards to tension steel reinforcement in the compressed region, when

withstanding effects of external force in a previous compressed stage,
calculating compressed intensity Rsc (refers to articles 6.2.2.6, 6.2.2.7,
6.2.2.11, 6.2.2.18) needs to replaced by stress σ sc = σ sc, u − σ sp
′ (MPa) but not
greater than R sc , in there σ sp

′ is determined with coefficient γ sp > 1 , σ sc ,u
based on article 6.2.2.3.
88
A. Rectangle bending component, syllable T, I and ear-rings

6.2.2.6 Regarding the rectangle sections of the bent component mentioned in article
x
6.2.2.2 (Picture 4), when ξ = ≤ ξR needs to calculate based on condition:
h0
M ≤ R b bx (h0 − 0,5 x ) + R sc A' s (h0 − a' ) (28)
In there, the height of the compressed region x is determined from condition:
Rs As − Rsc A' s = Rb bx (29)
A's
a'
Rsc A's
Rb Ab
x
M
Ab
h0
h
As
Rs As
a
Picture 4 – Internal force outline and stress chart of the perpendicular

section with longitudinal Pedal fulcrum component of bent reinforeced
concrete when calculating durability.
6.2.2.7 Calculation of section that has wings in compressed region when

ξ = x h0 ≤ ξ R needs to carry out base on position of compressed selvage
region:
a) if compressed selvage region does go through wing (Picture 5a), it means
satisfying condition:
R s As ≤ R b b' f h' f + R sc A' s (30)
Then calculations are done similar to the rectangle section with the width b’f
based on article 6.2.2.6.
89
b) if the compressed selvage region goes through the girder abdomen (bụng
dầm) (picture 5b) means it does not conform condition (30), then calculation
is carried out based on condition:
M ≤ Rb bx (h0 − 0,5 x ) + Rb (b' f −b) h' f (h0 − 0,5h' f ) + Rsc A' s (h0 − a' ) (31)
In there, the height of the reinforced concrete in compressed region x is

determined from condition :
Rs As − Rsc A's = Rbbx + Rb b' f −b h' f( ) (32)
Value b′f is used to calculate from condition: width of each wing from girder
abdomen margin is not greater than 1/6 component span and b′f is not greater:
 When there is a transverse frame or when h′f ≥ 0,1 h : 1/2 distance goes
through longitudinal frames;
 When there is no transverse frame or when distance among themselves is
greater than the distance among longitudinal frames, h′f < 0,1 h :
.................................................................. 6 h′f ;
 When wing has console form:
 In case h′f ≥ 0.1 h : .................................................. 6 h′f

 In case 0.05 h ≤ h′f < 0.1 h : .................................... 3 h′f
 In case h′f < 0.05 h : ................................................ wing doesnt relate in
calculation.
a) b)
b'f b'f
A's A's
a'
a'
x
h'f
h'f
x
h
h0
h0
a
a
As As
b b
Picture 5 – Position of compressed selvage region in section of bent
90
reinforeced concrete component

a – at wing; b – at abdomen
6.2.2.8 When calculating based on the durability of curled building components, it

should be conformed by the term of x ≤ ξ R h0 . In case that if the area of
strained steel rod set as the demand of composition, or calculated as the
conditions of the second limit is taken greater in the comparison with the
demanded steel rod in order to abide by the term x ≤ ξ R h0 , it is necessary to do
calculation upon the formulas used for general cases (refered the clause
6.2.2.19).
If the result coming out from formula (29) or (32) indicates x > ξ R h0 , it allows
to do upon the terms of (28) and (31), then the height of relatively
compressed area is determined by the formulas:
σ s As − Rsc As' = Rbbx (33)
(
σ s As − Rsc As' = Rbbx + Rb b 'f − b h'f ) (34)
In there:
0,2 + ξ R
σs = Rs (35)
σ sp ⎛ ξ ⎞
0,2 + ξ + 0,35 ⎜⎜ 1 − ⎟⎟
Rs ⎝ ξ R ⎠
herein
ξ = x h0 ( x counted by the value Rs included with correlative
coefficients of working condition of steel rod):
σ sp – determined by the value γ sp > 1,0.
For the building components made up of concrete at level of B30 and lower
within unstretched steel rod of group CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII, A-III and Bp-I,
in the term x > ξ R h0 it allows to do as the condition (28) and (31), in there
replacing for the value of x = ξ R h0 .
6.2.2.9 For the curled building component with the O-ring (round-edged) section that
has the ratio between internal & external radius at r1 r2 > 0,5 and put the steel
rod evenly by circumference (amount of bar is not less than 6), the calculation
91
needs to be carried out the same as counting offset compressed building

components in the clause 6.2.2.12. At that time, in formulas (41) & (42) taking
N = 0 and in formula (40) replacing Ne0 for the value of curled moment M .
B. Offset compressed building component with the rectangle & O-ring (round-
edged) section.
6.2.2.10 When calculating the offset compressed building component of ferro-
concrete, it needs to count for early incidential offset deviation according to
the clause 4.2.12, as well for the impact of flexure on forced faculty of
building component according to the clause 6.2.2.15.
6.2.2.11 In calculating the offset compressed building component that has rectangle
section quoted in the clause 6.2.2.2 must do:
a) when ξ = x h0 ≤ ξ R (Figure 6) as the term:
Ne ≤ Rb bx (h0 − 0,5 x ) + Rsc As' (h0 − a ') (36)
In there, the height of compressed area is determined by formula:
N + Rs As − Rsc As' = Rbbx (37)

N
Rb A's
e'
a'
Rsc A's
Rb Ab
x
e
Ab
h0
h
Rs As As
a
Figure 6 – Diagram of internal force and chart of pressure on the

section that is perpendicular to vertical axis of the offset compressed
ferro-concrete building component based on the durability
b) when ξ = x h0 > ξ R – also as the term (36), but the height of compressed
area is determined as the following:
• For the building components made up of concrete equal or less at level

of B30, steel rod of group CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII, A-III, x determined
by formula:
92
N + σ s As − Rsc As' = Rbbx (38)
In there:
⎛ 1− x / h ⎞
σ s = ⎜⎜ 2 0
− 1⎟⎟ Rs (39)
⎝ 1 − ξ R ⎠
• For the building components made up of concrete greater at level of

B30 as well for the building components used by steel rod of group
higher than A-III (with or without initial corresponding force) – x
specified by formulas (66), (67) or (68).
6.2.2.12 For the offset compressed building component with O-ring (round-edged)
section that ratio between internal and external radius is r1 r1 ≥ 0,5 , steel rod is
evenly distributed by circumference (amount of vertical steel rod bar is not
less than 6), it can be counted by the term:
sin π ξ cir
Ne0 ≤ (Rb Arm + Rsc As,tot rs ) + Rs As,totϕ s z s (40)
π
In there, relative area of concrete in compression-resistant area is specified by

formula:
ξ cir =
N + σ ( sp )
+ ω 1 R s A s , tot
(41)
R b A + (R sc + ω 2 R s ) A s , tot
If the result according to formula (41) shows value ξ cir < 0,15 , so in formula
(40) value ξ cir determined by formula:
ξ cir =
( )
N + σ sp + ϕ s Rs As ,tot
(42)
Rb A + Rsc As ,tot
In there, value ϕ s and zs determined by formulas (43) and (44)

within ξ cir = 0,15 .
Amongst formulas from (40) to (42):

rm – Medium value of internal & external radius of section;
rs – The radius of circle passing across the center of steel rod;
As,tot – Total area of vertical steel rod section;
93
ϕs – Coefficient, specified by formula:

ϕ s = ω1 − ω2ξ cir (43)
zs – Distance from united forces of strained steel rod to section focus is

determined by formula (44) but not greater than rs :
z s = (0 , 2 + 1, 3ξ cir ) rs (44)
σ sp – Determined by coefficient γ sp > 1 ;
ω1 – Coefficient, specified by formula:

σ sp
ω1 = η r − (45)
Rs
Here:
η r – Coefficient, corresponding to steel rod:
+..............................................................................................
With practical limit of flow (group of CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII, A-
III): ........................................................................................... 1,0
+..............................................................................................
With conventional limit of flow (group of CIV, A-IV, A-V, A-
VI, AT-VII,
B-II, Bp-II, K-7, K-19): ............................................................ 1,1
NOTE: Refer appendix B for steels without complying to
Vietnam Standard.
ω 2 – Coefficient, specified by formula:
ω2 = ω1δ (46)
In there, value δ is taken by:
δ = 1,5 + 6Rs 10−4 (47)

R s – taken equal to MPa.
If the result as formula (43) show value ϕ s ≤ 0 , so in formula (40)

replacing ϕ s = 0 and value ξ cir counted by formula (41) with ω1 = ω 2 = 0 .
94
6.2.2.13 Building component within condensed section made up of heavy concrete,

tiny-stone concrete putting indirect steel rod is calculated as indications in
clauses 6.2.2.11 and 6.2.2.19. Section for counting is just part of concrete
section Aef , restricted by axes of outermost concrete bar of steel net or axes of
spiral hoop concrete (Figure 7). At that time, Rb in formulas from (36) to
(38), (65) and (66) is replaced by converted prism intensity R b,red , in case of
fibre steel rod at high intensity, Rsc is replaced by Rsc, red .
Thinness l0 ief of building component putting indirect steel rod is not beyond
the value:
+ 55, when indirect steel rod is steel net;
+ 35, when indirect steel rod is spiral.
In there: ief – inertia radius of counted section part.
95
a) b)
s
s
As,cir
Aef
Asx Aef As,cir
Asy
ly
lx def
Figure 7 – Compressed building component with indirect steel rod

a) in steel net; b) in spiral steel rod
Value R b,red specified by the following formula:
a) When indirect steel rod is steel net, R b,red is counted as following:
R b,red = R b + ϕμ xy R s, xy (48)
In there, Rs, xy is the calculational intensity of bar in steel net;
nx Asxl x + n y Asy l y
μ xy = (49)
Aef s
here:
n x , Asx , l x – corressponding to amount of bars, the area of cross section
and the length of bar in steel net in the same direction
(calculating as the distance in the middle of axis of outermost
steel rod bars);
n y , Asy , ly – similar, but according to the opposite direction;
Aef – the area of concrete in scope of steel net;
96
s – Distance amongst steel nets;

ϕ – Coefficient included in the impact of indirect steel rod,
specified by formula:
1 (50)
ϕ=
0,23 + ψ
μ xy R s, xy
with ψ= (51)
R b + 10
Rs, xy , Rb counted through MPa.
For building component made up of tiny-stone, coefficient ϕ

is taken not greater than 1, 0. Section area of bars in welded
steel net in a length unit as this direction or the other is not
differentiated beyond 1, 5 times.
b) When putting indirect steel rod within spiral or round shape, R b,red
counted by formula:
⎛ 7,5e0 ⎞
Rb, red = Rb + 2 μ cir Rs , cir ⎜1 − ⎟ (52)
⎜ d ⎟
⎝ ef ⎠
In there:
e0 – offset deviation of vertical strength (excluded from the impact of
flexure);
R s,cir – calculational intensity of spiral framework;
μ cir – content of steel rod, taken by:
4 As,cir
μcir = (53)
def s
here:
As , cir – section area of spiral framework;
d ef – section diameter in spiral framework;
s – spiral step.
Value of steel rod’s content determined by formulas (49) and (53), for
building component made up of tiny-stone concrete is taken not beyond 0,04.
97
Compressed intensity Rsc, red in converted calculation of vertical steel rod,

high intensity of group CIV, A-IV, A-V, A-VI and AT-VII, for building
component made up of heavy concrete that has indirect steel rod in welded
steel net, determined by formula (54):
⎡⎛ R ⎞
2 ⎤
1 + δ 1 ⎢⎜⎜ s ⎟⎟ − 1⎥
⎢⎝ R sc ⎠ ⎥
R sc , red = R sc ⎣ ⎦ (54)
⎛ R ⎞
1 + δ 1 ⎜⎜ s − 1 ⎟⎟
⎝ R sc ⎠
But taken not higher than Rs .
In formula (54):
8,5 E s ψ θ
δ1 = (55)
Rs ⋅ 10 3
In there:
As ,tot ⎛ R ⎞
θ = 0,8 + η ⎜1 − b ⎟
Aef ⎝ 100 ⎠
here:
η – coefficient, counted as following:
+ For group of steel rod CIV, A-IV: .......... 10

+ For group of steel rod A-V, A-VI, AT-VII: 25
As,tot – total section area of high intensity, vertical steel rod bars;
Aef – alike in formula (49);
Rb – counted equal to MPa.
Value θ taken not less than 1,0 and greater than:

+ For group of steel rod CIV, A-IV: .......... 1,2
+ For group of steel rod A-V, A-VI, AT-VII 1,6.
When specifying limited value of relative height in compressed area for
section of indirect steel rod as formula (25), then value ω in there taken by
formula:
98
ω = α − 0,008 R b + δ 2 ≤ 0,9 (56)
In there:
α – Coefficient, taken through clause 6.2.2.3;
δ2 – coefficient, taken equally to 10μ , but not higher than 0,15;
here, μ is content of steel rod μ xy or μcir determined by formula (49)

and (53) corresponding to indirect steel rod in the form of steel net or
spiral.
Value σ sc,u in formula (25) for building component within steel rod in high
intensity taken by:
σ sc,u = (2 + 8,5ψθ ) Es ⋅ 10 −3 (57)
But not greater than:

 900 MPa for steel rod of group CIV, A-IV;
 1200 MPa for steel rod of group A-V, A-VI, AT-VII.
When examining the impact of flexure on strength-proof faculty of building
component putting indirect steel rod, it need to use indications in clause
6.2.2.15 in defining inertia moment of section part restricted by bars of steel
net or lied down in the scope of spiral hoop. Value N cr calculated by formula
(58) need to multiply with coefficient ϕ1 = 0,25 + 0,05 l0 cef ≤ 1,0 (here: cef is
equal to the height or diameter of concrete section part included in the
calculation), and in determining δ e, min , the second term in right-hand side of
formula (22) is replaced by 0,01(l0 cef )ϕ 2 , with i ϕ 2 = 0 ,1 (l 0 c ef ) − 1 ≤ 1, 0 .
Indirect steel rod included in the calculation under the condition that when
forced faculty of building component specified by the indications in this
clause (with Aef and Rb, red ) is beyond its forced faculty but determined by
whole section A and counted intensity value of concrete Rb excluded from
the impact of indirect steel rod.
However, indirect steel rod need to repond to the demands of composition by
the clause 8.7.3.
99
6.2.2.14 When calculating compression-resistant building component with indirect

steel rod, it need to consider crack-against for protection concrete clayer
beside doing the calculation of durability accoding to clause 6.2.2.13.
It is done as indications in clauses 6.2.2.11 and 6.2.2.19 according to utility
value of calculated loading capacity ( γ f = 1,0) in which total area of concrete
section and víi examined intensity, taken by Rb, ser and Rs, ser used for the state
of the second limit, counted compression-resistant intensity of concrete is
taken equally to value Rs , ser but not higher than 400 MPa.
When determing limited value of fair height of compression-resistant area in

formula (25) and (69), take σ sc,u = 400 MPa, but in formula (26) coefficient
0,008 replaced for 0,006.
When considering the impact of thinness, it need to conform to the
indications in clause 6.2.2.15, in there δ e is specified by formula (22) but
replacing0,01 Rb for 0,008 Rb, ser .
6.2.2.15 When doing calculation for offset building component, it needs to examine
the impact of flexure on strengthed capacity of building component through
calculating structure according to variant diagram (refer clause 4.2.6).
It allows to calculate structure according to non-variant diagram if the impact
of flexure (in case of thinness l i > 14 ) on the durability, determined by the
terms (36), (40), (65), through multiplying e0 with coefficient η . When
conventional critical force in the formula (19) for η is taken by:
⎡ ⎛ ⎞ ⎤
⎢ ⎜ ⎟ ⎥
⎜ 0,11 ⎟ (58)
= 2 b ⎢
6,4 E I ⎥
N cr ⎜ + 0 ,1 ⎟ + α I
l0 ⎢ ϕ δe s
⎥
⎢
l ⎜ 0,1 + ⎟ ⎥
⎜ ϕp ⎟
⎣⎢ ⎝ ⎠ ⎦⎥
In there:
l0 – taken from clause 6.2.2.16;
δe – Coefficient, taken from clause 6.1.2.5;
ϕl – Coefficient, determined by formula (21), in there moment M , T
determined over axis parallel to sideline of compressed area and past
100
across the focus of bar in which steel rod is most strained or least
compressed (when total section is compressed). M is caused by the
action of entire loading capacity, T is caused by the action of
permanent loading capacity and long-term temporary loading
capacity. If above moments (or offset deviation) have different
signals, it needs to follow instructions in clause 6.1.2.5.
ϕp – Coefficient examining the influence of strained steel rod on the
hardness of structure. When compressed strength is evenly spread
over section, ϕ p determined by formula:
σ bp e0
ϕ p = 1 + 12 (59)
Rb h
In there:
σ bp – determined through coefficient γ sp < 1,0 ;
Rb – taken without considering coefficients about working

condition of concrete;
value e0 h taken not larger than 1,5;
α = Es Eb
For building components made up of tiny-stone in group B, value 5,6 is

replaced for value 6,4 in formula (58):
In calculating the impact of plane outer-curling moment, offset deviation of
vertical force e0 is taken by incidential offset deviation (refer clause 4.2.12).
6.2.2.16 It should determine the countable length l0 of building compoment’s
reinforced concrete being incured by offset compression by the same way for
building component of frame structure that is included in its inflextional state
when loading capacity put in the most disadvantageous postion for building
component, as well considered about inelastic deformations of material and
the presence of cracks over building component.
For building component of normal structure, it allows to calculate the
countable length l0 of building components as the followings:
101
a) For columns of multistage house in which amount of spans isnot lesser

than two, combination of girder and column is supposedly strong when floor
structure:
+ assembled: l0 = H ;
+ block-poured: l0 = 0,7 H ,
in there H is storey length (distance amongst the middle of caps);
b) For column of one-storey house combinated matchingly with roof
strengthed structure (system of roof stucture is considered hard in its plane,
with the faculty of cross strength transmission), as well column of shoal
bridge: l0 taken from Table 31.
c) For building component of frame and arch: l0 taken from Table 32.
Table 31 – Countable length l0 of one-storey house
Value l0 counted in plane
Across Perpendicular to
Features frame / cross frame or
perpendicul parallel to axis of
ar to axis of shoal bridge when
shoal bridge
within without
Straps in the plane of
vertical columns or
attached pillows
House Including Part of lower Non- 1.5 H1 0.8 H1 1.2 H1
with loading column for continuous
structu capacity bridge crane continuous 1.2 H1 0.8 H1 0.8 H1
re of bridge girder
crane Part of upper Non- 2.0 H 2 1.5 H 2 2.0 H 2
column for continuous
bridge crane continuous 2.0 H 2 1.5 H 2 1.5 H 2
girder
102
Excluded Part of lower Only one 1.5 H 0.8 H1 1.2 H

from column for span
loading bridge crane Multi-span 1.2 H 0.8 H1 1.2 H
capacity girder
of bridge Part of upper Non- 2.5 H 2 1.5 H 2 2.0 H 2
crane column for continuous
bridge crane continuous 2.0 H 2 1.5 H 2 1.5 H 2
girder
House Level Part of lower Only one 1.5 H 0.8 H 1.2 H
withou column column span
t Multi-span 1.2 H 0.8 H 1.2 H
structu
re Part of upper column 2.5 H 2 2.0 H 2 2.5 H 2
Column with non-variant Only one 1.5 H 0.8 H 1.2 H
section span
Multi-span 1.2 H 0.8 H 1.2 H
Shoal With bridge crane girder Non- 2.0 H1 0.8 H1 1.5 H1
bridge continuous
continuous 1.5 H1 0.8 H1 1.0 H1
When combining between marching 2.0 H 1.0 H 2.0 H
pole for pipe and span hard 1.5 H 0.7 H 1.5 H
Signal:
H – entire height of column counted from upper surface of foundation to cross
structure (pole frame or oblique bar of house beam for pole) over corresponding
plane;
H1 – Height of lower part of column (counted from upper surface of foundation to
lower surface of bridge crane girder).
H 2 – Height of upper part of column (counted from upper surface of column step to
across structure in corresponding plane).
NOTE: If there is a link to column top in house within bridge crane, countable height
of upper part of column in the plane within axis of vertical column rank is taken by H 2 .
103
Table 32 – Countable length l0 of building component of frame and arch
Type of building component Countable length

l0 of building
component of frame
& arch
1. a) Upper part In the e0 < (1 8)h1 0.9 l
Structures of beam in plane of
of frame calculating frame e0 ≥ (1 8)h1 0.8 l
For the lower part of

Beyond the heaven’s gate, when
plane of width of heaven’s gate 0.8 l
frame larger or equal to 12m
For last cases 0.9 l
b) Oblique and In the plane of frame 0.8 l
standing beam
Beyond the b1 b2 < 1,5 0.9 l
in calculating
plane of
b1 b2 ≥ 1,5 0.8 l
frame
2. Arch Counting 3 joints 0.580 L
in the plane
2 joints 0.540 L
of arch
Without joint 0.365 L
Counting outside the plane of frame
L
(if any)
NOTE:
l – length of structure counted by centre of caps; for beam’s upper part of frame when
calculating in the plane of frame, l is distance amongst their caps;
L – length of arch along its geometrical axis; when calculating beyond the plane of frame,
L is distance amongst its united points along perpendicular direction to arch plane ;
h1 – frame’s section height of upper beam;
b1 b2 – corresponding section width of frame’s upper beam and standing beam (oblique).
104
C. Pulled structure in the right centre

6.2.2.17 When counting section of reinforced concrete building component being
occurred by strain in the right centre must follow the condition:
N ≤ Rs As ,tot (60)
In there, As ,tot is section area of entire vertical steel rod.
D. Offset pulled structure of rectangle section

6.2.2.18 Counting section of offset pulled building component cited in clause
6.2.2.2 need to be done upon post to set upright force N :
a) If upright force N is put in an interval of united forces in steel rod S and
S ′ (Figure 8a): taken by the condition:
Ne ≤ Rs As' (h0 − a' ) (61)

Ne' ≤ R s As (h0 − a' ) (62)
b) If upright force N is put outside an interval of united forces in steel rod S
and S ′ (Figure 8b), taken by the condition:
Ne ≤ R b bx (h0 − 0,5 x ) + Rsc As' (h0 − a' ) (63)

In there, height of compressed area x determined by the condition:
R s As − Rsc As' − N = R b bx (64)

If based on formula (64) to determine value x > ξ R h0 , therefore in formula (63)
replacing x = ξ R h0 , with ξ R is determined according to clause 6.2.2.3.
a) A's
a'
Rs A's
e'
h0
N
h
As
e
R s As
a
105
b) A's
a'
Rb
Rsc A's
R b Ab
x
Ab
h0
h
As
R s As
e
b
N
Figure 8 – Diagram of internal force and graph of pressure over
perpendicular section to upright axis of offset pulled reinforced
concrete’s building component, in calculating section based on
durability
a – upright force N put inside interval of united forces S , S ′ ;
b – upright force N put outside interval of united forces S , S ′
106
E. In case of general calculation

(With section, external force and arrangement of steel rod at any)
6.2.2.19 To calculate section in general case (Figure 9) need to be done by the

condition:
M ≤ ± (RbSb − ∑σsiSsi ) (65)

In there: “plus sign +” prior brackets used in case that structure incurred with
offset compresson and curl, “minus sign” prior brackets used in case that
structure incurred with pull.
I
Rb
h01
h02
σs1 As1
h03
1 σs2 As2
h08
2 σs3 As3
h 04
3 x Rb Ab
h 07
8 A
σs8 As8
h 06
h05
σs4 As4
4
7 B
6
σs7 As7
σs6 As6
5 σs5 As5
I
C
Figure 9 - Diagram of internal strength and graph of pressure over

perpendicular section to upright axis of reinforced concrete’s
building component, in general case to calculate section based on
durability
I-I – is the plane parallel to affected plane of curled moment, or the plane that
pass the putting point of upright force and the uniting point of strained &
compressed internal force;
A – putting point of united forces inside compressed steel rod and inside
concrete of compressed area;
B – putting point of united force inside strained steel rod;
C – putting point of external force
In formula (65):
107
M – In curled structure: is projection of moment due of external force over

plane perpendicular to straight line restricting compressed area of
section;
– In offset compressed and strained structure: is moment due of
external force N opposite to parallel axis to straight line restricting
compressed area and passing:
+ Section’s focus of upright steel rod bars that is most strained or
least compressed when building component is incurred with
offset strain;
+ Point upon compressed area, far away from straight line
restricting compressed area above all the others when building
component incurred with offset strain;
Sb – Tranquil moment of section area for compressed concrete area
forwards corresponding axis in above-cited axis. When for curled
building component, position of axis is taken similar to case of offset
curled building component;
S si – Tranquil moment of area of upright steel rod bar in the i th position
opposite to corresponding axis in above-cited axis;
σ si – Pressure of upright steel rod in the i th position determined based on
the instructions by this.
Height of compressed area x and pressure σ si determined by solving
concurrently equations:
R b Ab − ∑ σ si Asi ± N = 0 (66)
σ sc,u ⎛ω ⎞
σ si = ⎜⎜ − 1 ⎟⎟ + σ spi (67)
ω ⎝ ξi ⎠
1−
1,1
In equation (66), “minus sign” prior value N used for offset strained building
component, “plus sign” for offset pulled building component.
Moreover, to determine border position of compressed area when curling

oblique need to conform to additional condition about parallel of affected
108
plane of moment due of internal and external force, while compressing or

pulling oblique offset, need more terms: putting points of external force
affecting upright on axis, of compressed united forces in compressed
concrete and steel rod, and of united forces in pulled steel rod (or external
force affecting upright on axis, compressed united forces in concrete and
united forces in total steel rod) must lie down all in the same straight line
(Figure 9).
If value σ si counted by formula (67) for steel rod of group CIV, A-IV, A-V,
A-VI, AT-VII, B-II, Bp-II, K-7 and K-19 beyond β R si , pressure σ si is
determined by formula:
⎡ ξ eli − ξ i ⎤
σ si = ⎢ β + (1 − β )
ξ eli − ξ Ri ⎥⎦ si
R
⎣
(68)
In case that pressure is found upon formula (68) beyond R si excluded from
coefficient γ s 6 , in formula (65), (66) value σ si replaced by R si inclusive of
coefficients of correlative working condition, within coefficient γ s6 (refer
clause 6.2.2.4).
Pressure σ si attached with calculated signs based on formula (67) and (68),
when calculating, it need to conform the following terms:
- In any case R si ≥ σ si ≥ Rsci ;
- For previous correspondant force building component σ si > σ sci , here

′
σ sci is pressure in steel rod, using previous correspondant force σ spi
minus quantity σ sc,u (refer clause 6.2.2.3 and 6.2.2.13).
In formulas from (66) to (68):

Asi – section area of bar of the ith upright steel rod;
σ spi – previous corresponding force in bar of the ith steel rod, inclusive of
coefficient γ sp , determined upon position putting bar of steel rod;
109
ξi – relative height over compressed area of concrete, ξi = x h0i in there

th
h0i is distance from axis passing centre of section of the i steel rod
bar and parallel to straight line restricting from compressed area to
the farrest point of compressed area (Figure 9);
ω – specific strait of compressed area, defined by formula (26) or (56);
ξ Ri , ξ eli – relative height of compressed area reponds to the moment when
pressure of steel rod reaching correspondant values Rsi and β Rsi ;
value ξ Ri and ξ eli defined by formula:
ω (69)
ξ Ri (eli ) =
σ s, Ri (eli ) ⎛ ω⎞
1+ ⎜1 − ⎟
σ sc ,u ⎝ 1,1 ⎠
here:
when determining ξ si : σ s, Ri = Rsi + 400 − σ spi − Δσ spi , σ s, Ri counted
for MPa;
when determining ξ eli : σ s,eli = β Rsi − σ spi , σ s,eli counted for MPa;
σ sc,u – refer clause 6.2.2.3 and 6.2.2.13.
Value Δσ spi and coefficient β are determined as followings:
- When activating previous corresponding force to sorts of steel rod in

group of CIV, A-IV, A-V, A-VI, AT-VII through mechanical methods, as
well auto thermo-electric method or mechanical thermo-electricity, used
by formula:
σ spi
Δσ spi = 1500 − 1200 ≥ 0 (70)
Rsi
σ spi
β = 0,5 + 0,4 ≥ 0,8 (71)
Rsi
- When activating previous corressponding force to sorts of steel rod in

group CIV, A-IV, A-V, A-VI, AT-VII through different methods, as well
activating previous corresspondant force to sorts of steel rod in group B-II,
110
Bp-II, K-7 and K-19 through any method, take value Δσ spi = 0 and
coefficient β = 0,8.
In formulas (70), (71), σ spi taken inclusive of wastes cited on item 3 to item 5
of table 6 with coefficient γ sp < 1,0.
Note: Indicator i is ordinal number of steel rod in examining.

6.2.3 Calculating the tilting section with upright axis of building component
6.2.3.1 In calculating building component of ferro-concrete based on tilting section
need to be done in order to guarantee the durability when incuring effects by:
- Cutting force over tilting range amongst oblique cracks (refer clause
6.2.3.2);
- Cutting force over oblique crack (refer clause 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.5);
- Cutting force over compressed tilting range bewteen position putting
loading capacity and agianst pillow (for short console of column, refer
clause 6.2.3.6);
- Curled moment over tilting crack (refer clause 6.2.3.7).
6.2.3.2 Building component of ferro-concrete affected by cutting force need counting
to guarantee the durability on tilting range amongst oblique cracks based on
the term:
Q ≤ 0,3ϕ w1 ϕb1 Rb bh0 (72)
Coefficient ϕ w1 , considering the impact of hoop steel rod perpendicular to

upright axis of building component, is determined as the formula:
ϕ w1 = 1 + 5 α μ w (73)
But not higher than 1,3,
In there: α = Es , μ w = Asw
Eb bs
Coefficient ϕb1 is determined by formula:
ϕ b1 = 1 − β R b (74)
111
In there:
β – coefficient, taken as below:
+ For heavy, tiny-stone, beehive concrete: ............................0,01

+ For light concrete: ..............................................................0,02
Rb counted by MPa.
6.2.3.3 For structure of reinforced concrete that has cross steel rod (Figure 10) and
incurs cutting force, in order to guarantee durability along oblique crack it
needs to calculate with the most risky tilting section based on the term:
Q ≤ Qb + Qsw + Qs , inc (75)
Cutting force Q in formula (75) determined by external force put in one side
of examined tilting section.
Qb
s s s s s s
Rsw Asw
Rsw Asw
Rsw As, inc
Rsw Asw
c0
c
Figure 10 – Diargram of internal force over tilting section with

standing axis of reinforced concrete building concrete when
calculating durability incured by cutting force
Cutting force Qb only incured by concrete, determined by the formula:
ϕb 2 (1 + ϕ f + ϕ n ) Rbt bh02
Qb = (76)
c
In there c – projection length of the most risky tilting section over standing
axis of structure.
Coefficient ϕb 2 examining the impact of concrete is taken by the followings:
112
- For heavy concrete and beehive concrete: ......................... 2,0

- For tiny-stone concrete: ...................................................... 1,7
- For light concrete labeled along average specific amount:
+ ≥ D1900 ....................................................................... 1,90
+ ≤ D1800: Using core of minor & condensed material: 1,75

Using core of minor & hollow material: ..... 1,50
Coefficient ϕ f considering the impact of compressed vane in section of letter
T shape, letter I shape is determined by formula:
ϕ f = 0 ,75
(b '
f )
− b h'f
(77)
b h0
But not higher than 0,5.
In formula (77), b ′f isnot greater than b + 3h ′f , at the same time cross steel rod
need to be attached on vane.
Coefficient ϕ n , considering the impact of upright firce, is determined as the
following:
- When incuring upright compressed force, determine as the formula:
N (78)
ϕn = 0,1
Rbt bh0
But not higher than 0,5.
For structure of previous corresspondant force, in formula (78) replacing
N for previous compressed force P ; the advantagous impact of
compressed force along axis will not be examined if compressed force
along axis result curled moment in having the same sign with moment
caused by the effect of cross loading capacity.
- When incuring pulled force along axis, determine as the formula:
N (79)
ϕ n = − 0 ,2
R bt bh 0
But absolute value is not greater than 0,8.
113
Value (1 + ϕ f + ϕ n ) in any case is not higher than 1,5.
Value Qb counted based on formula (76) is not less than

ϕb3 (1 + ϕ f + ϕ n ) Rbt bh0 .
Coefficient ϕb3 counted as the followings:
- For heavy concrete and beehive concrete: ......................... 0,6

- For tiny-stone concrete: ....................................................... 0,5
- For light concrete labeled along average specific quantity:
+ ≥ D1900: .................................................................. 0,5
+ ≤ D1800: ................................................................. 0,4

For ferro-concrete building component with cross steel rod also need to keep
durability upon tilting section in interval of hoop steel rod, between pillow
and oblique steel rod, and amongst oblique steel rods each other.
Cut force Qsw and Qs ,inc is determined by projection sum of critical internal
forces responding in hoop steel rod and oblique steel rod cut risky oblique
crack past perpendicular axis to standing axis of building component.
Length c0 of projection of risky oblique crack over standing axis of building
component based on minimum condition of expression (Qb + Qsw + Qs,inc ). In
formula to define Qb replacing value c for c0 , value c0 is not greater than
2h0 and not greater than value c , concurrently c0 is not less than 2h0 if
c > h0 .
For building component just putting hoop steel rod perpendicular to standing
axis of building component, that have unchanged step in gap of tilting section
in considering, value c0 corressponding to minimum of expression (Qb + Qsw )
determined by formula:
ϕ b 2 (1 + ϕ n + ϕ f ) R bt bh 02
c0 = (80)
q sw
114
In there: qsw – internal force in hoop steel rod over one unit of building
component length, is determined by formula:
Rsw Asw
q sw = (81)
s
For such building components, cut force Qsw determined by formula:
Qsw = q sw co (82)
In there, hoop steel rod determined upon calculation need to repond to

condition:
ϕb3 (1 + ϕ n + ϕ f ) Rbt b
qsw ≥ (83)
2
Beside, hoop steel rod need to meet demands in clauses from 8.7.5 to 8.7.7.
When calculating building component of upright steel rod in group CIV, A-
IV, A-IIIB or group A-V, A-VI, AT-VII (using in combination), coefficients
ϕb 2 , ϕb3 as well ϕb 4 (clause 6.2.3.4) need to multiply with coefficient 0,8.
6.2.3.4 For building component of ferro-concrete without hoop steel rod incured by
cut force, in order to guarantee durability on oblique crack, it need to
calculate for the most risky oblique crack upon condition:
ϕ b 4 (1 + ϕ n ) Rbt b h02
Q≤ (84)
c
In there: right-hand side of formula (84) isnot greater than 2,5 Rb bh0 and not
less than ϕ b3 (1 + ϕ n )Rbt bh0 .
Coefficient ϕ b 4 taken as below:
 For heavy concrete, beehive concrete: ................................ 1,5

 For tiny-stone concrete: ....................................................... 1,2
 For light concrete labeled with average specific quantity:
+ ≥ D1900: ................................................................. 1,2
+ ≤ D1800: ................................................................. 1,0
115
Coefficients ϕb3 and ϕ n as well values Q and c in formula (84) are

determined based on clause 6.2.3.3.
If there is no cracks perpendicular to standing axis in area under examination
about the effect of cut force, it means that if keeping condition (127) when
replacing Rbt , ser for Rbt , it allows increasing durability of building component
in calculating upon condition (144) by the way replacing Rbt , ser and Rb, ser
corressponding to Rbt and Rb .
6.2.3.5 For building component of ferro-concrete with tilting compressed border

(Figure 11) incured by cut force, in order to guarantee durability over tilting
section, it need to calculate upon clauses 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4. In there,
working height in scope of tilting section under consideration, is taken as
below
- For building component with cross steel rod : value h0 is max great;
- For building component without steel rod: value h0 is medium.
h0
Figure 11 – Diagram of calculating girder of reinfroced concrete with tilting

compressed border
6.2.3.6 For short console of ferro-concrete incurred by cut force, in order to

guarantee durability on compreesed tilting range bewteen affected loading
capacity and pillow, it need to calculate upon condition:
Q ≤ 0,8ϕ w2 Rb blb sinθ (85)
In there: right-hand side of expression (85) is not greater than 3,5Rbt bh0 and
less than right-hand side of expression (84); θ is tilting angle bewteen
compressed range counted with cross direction.
Width of compressed tilting range lb determined upon formula:
l b = l sup sin θ (86)
116
In there: lsup – length of transmittal area along rising length of console.
When determining length lsup need to examine feature of loading capacity

transmission upon different diagrams of against pillows of structure over
console (free against girder or underground girder, put along console or
perpendicular to console, etc)
Q
l
lsup
lb
h
h0
θ
Figure 12 – Diagram of calculating short console
Coefficient ϕ w2 , considering hoop steel rod put on height of console, determined

upon formula:
ϕw2 = 1+ 5α μw1 (87)
Es A
In there: α = ; μw1 = sw ;
Eb bsw
Asw – section area of hoop steel rod at the same plane;
sw – space amongst hoop steel rods, according to their perpendicular
direction.
When it need to include in cross hoop steel rods and tilting hoop steel rods at
an angle not higher than 45o in comparsion with cross direction.
Putting cross steel rod of short console need to meet the demands in clause
8.7.9.
6.2.3.7 Building components of ferro-concrete incurring curled moment (Figure 13),
in order to guarantee durability over tilting section need to be counted with
risky tilting section as the term:
117
M ≤ M s + M sw + M s ,inc (88)
Moment M in formual (88) is determined by external force put at a side of
tilting section under consideration for perpendicular axis to plane with the
effect of moment and past point putting united forces N b in compressed area.
Moments M s , M sw vµ M s,inc are sum of moments towards above-cited axis

due of corresponding internal forces in upright steel rod, hoop steel rod, and
oblique steel rod cutting over pulled area of tilting section.
When determining internal force in steel rod cutting off tilting section, it
needs notice to tight attachment of these steel rods on outside area of tilting
section.
Height of compressed area of tilting section is determined based on equal
condition for projection of internal forces in concrete of compressed area and
in steel rod cutting over pulled area of tilting section on upright axis of
building component.
zs, inc
s s s Nb
Rsw Asw
zs
Rsw Asw
Rsw Asw Rsw As, inc
Rs As
zsw
zsw
zsw
c
Figure13 – Diagram of internal force over tilting section with standing axis of
ferro-concrete building component when counting based on durability incuring
curled moment
Tilting section incured by the action of moment need to be counted at
positions of cutting or curling upright steel rod, as well at area nearby against
pillow of girder and at free head of console.
118
Beside, tilting section incuring the action of moment is still counted at

positions that suddently change shapes of building component (cutting partial
section, etc).
In positions near against pillow of building component, momnet M s incured
by upright steel rods cutting strained area of tilting section is determined by
formula:
Ms = Rs As zs (89)
In there:
As – area of upright steel rod cut tilting section;
zs – distance from united forces in upright steel rod to united forces in
compressed area.
If upright steel rod is not attached, their calculating pulled intensity Rs in the
post that cut off tilting section is reduced as item 5 table 23.
For structure made up of beehive concrete, internal force in standing steel rod
is determined as calculation just when examining working of cross attaches in
post nearby against pillow.
Moment M sw is incured by hoop steel rods perpendicular to standing axis of
building component, which have step without changes in scope of strained area
of tilting section under consideration, determined as formula:
c2
M sw = q sw (90)
2
In there:
qsw – internal force in hoop steel rod over a length unit of building
component, determined based on formula(81);
c – length of inclined section projection is most dangerous on erect axis of
building component.
119
6.2.4 Calculation on the spatial vertical section endurance (simulataneous spiral

bending resistant building component)
6.2.4.1 Upon calculating the spatial vertical section, the inner force is defined based
on the following assumptions:
- Ignoring the pulling-resistant capacity of concrete;
- The compressing-resistant zone of the spatial vertical section is assumed
flat, inclining a corner of θ to the vertical axis of the building component;
the compressing-resistant abilivty of concrete is equal to Rb sin 2 θ ,
arranging evenly on the compressing-resistant zone.
- The pulling pressure in the vertical steel rod and the horizontal steel rod
crossing the pulling-resistant zone of the considered spatial vertical
section is equal to the calculation intensity Rs and Rsw ;
- The pressure of the steel rod within the compressing-resistnat zone is

equal to Rsc for the un-taut steel rod and by the article 6.2.2.5 for the taut
steel rod.
Building component with the rectangular vertical section
6.2.4.2 Upon calculating the simulataneous spiral bending resistant building
component, it’s required to follow the condition:
M t ≤ 0,1Rb b 2 h (91)
In which: correlative b , h □ are the smaller and bigger sizes of the vertical
section.
The value Rb of the concrete at the level higher than B30 is taken as the
concrete at the level B30.
6.2.4.3 Calculation for the spatial vertical section on endurance (Picutre 14) should
1 + ϕ wδ λ 2
be impletmented accoridng to the condition: M t ≤ R s As (h0 − 0,5 x )
ϕq λ + χ
(92)
120
x
M
T
h
Rs As
a
Q
Rsw Asw s
Picture 14 – Diagram of the inner force in the spatial vertical

section of the simultaneous spiral bending resistant concrete on
caculation by the endurane
The height of the x compressing-resistant zone is defined from the condition:
R s As − R sc As′ = R b bx (93)
The calculation should be carried out with three position diagram of the
compressing-resistant zone of the spatial vertical section:
- Diagram 1: at the compressed side by bending of the building component
(Picture 15a);
- Diagram 2: at the side of the building component in parallel with the plane
of the bending moment (Picture 15b);
- Diagram 3: at the pulled side by bending of the building component
Picture 15c);
In the formulas 92) and (93):
As , As′ □ the area of the vertical steel rod section at the pulling-resistant zone
and the compressing-resistant zone is correlative with each
calculation diagram;
b, h □ the size of the sides of the building components parallel and
perpendicular to the limit line of the compressing-resistant zone:
121
b (94)
δ =
2h + b
c
λ=
b (95)
In which, c □ is the projection length of the limit line of the compressing-
resistant zone on the vertical axis of the building component. The calculation
is made with the most dangerous c value, c is defined by the gradually right
repeating method and is taken not higher than (2h + b) .
x
A's As As
a
x
h0
A's
h
h
h0
x
a
As h0 a A's
b h b
Picture 15: Diagram of the compressing-resistnat zone of the

spatial vertical section
a □ at the compressed side by bending; b □ at the side parallel to the plane of
the bending moment; c □ at the pulled side by bending
In the formula 92)á the value χ and ϕ q is specific forf the relation between
the inner forces M t , M , and Q are taken as follows:
- Without the bending moment: χ = 0 ; ϕ q = 1 ;

- When calculating by:
M
+ Diagram 1: χ = ; ϕq = 1
Mt
Qh
+ Diagram 2: χ = 0 ; ϕ q = 1+
2M t
M
+ Diagram 3: χ = − ; ϕq = 1
Mt
The spiraling moment Mt , the bending moment M and the cutting force Q are
taken at the vertical section perpendicular to the vertical axis of the building
122
component and crossing the gravity centre of the compressing-resistant zone

of the spatial vertical section.
The value of coefficient ϕ w is specific for the relation between the horizontal
steel rod and the vertical steel rod, defined by the formula:
Rsw Asw b
ϕw = (96)
Rs As s
In which:
Asw □ the area of the vertical section of a belt steel rod bar at the pulling-
resistant side of the reviewed calculation diagram;
s □ the distance between the above belt steel rods.
At that time, the value ϕ w is not smaller than
0,5
ϕw, min = (97)
1 + M / 2ϕwM u
And not higher than
⎛ M ⎞
ϕ w, max = 1,5 ⎜⎜1 − ⎟⎟ (98)
⎝ Mu ⎠
In which:
M □ the bending moment, is taken equal to 0 for Diagram 2;and taken with
mark □-□ for Diagram 3;
M u □ the biggest bending moment which the vertical section perpendicular to the
vertical axis of the building component can suffer.
If the value ϕ w caculated from the formual (96) is smaller than ϕ w , min , the
value of the inner force Rs As put in the formula (92), (93) is decreased by the
ratio ϕ w ϕ w, min .
If satisfying the condition:

M t ≤ 0,5Qb (99)
The calculation by Diagram 2 is made by the condition:
123
3M t
Q ≤ Q sw + Q b − (100)
b
In the formula(99), (100):

b □ the width of vertical section side perpendicular to the bending
plane;
Qsw , Qb □ is defined by the Article 6.2.3.3.
6.2.5 Calculation on the concrete building component suffering the local impact
of the intensity
A. Calculation on the local compressing resistance
6.2.5.1 Calculation on the local compressing-resistant vertical section (surface
compressing) without the horizontal steel rod needs to satisfy the condition:
N ≤ ψ R b,loc Aloc1 (101)
In which:
N □ the compressing force due to the local intensity;
Aloc1 □ the area of the local compressing resistance (Picture 16);
ψ □ coefficient, dependent on the characteristics of the local intensity

arrangement on the surface compressed area, taken as follows:
+ when the indensity is arranged evely: ............................... 1,0;
+ when the indensity is not arranged evely (under the girder, beam):
as for the heavy concrete, small-particle concrete, light concrete:
.................................................................................... 0,75
as for the bee-nest concrete: ...................................... 0,50
Rb,loc □ the local compressing-resistnat intensity of concrete is defined by the
formula:
Rb,loc = α ϕb Rb (102)
here: αϕ b ≥ 1;
+ α = 1 for the concrete at the level lower than B25;
124
Rbt
+ α = 13,5 for the concrete at the level B25 and higher ;
Rb
+ ϕ b = 3 Aloc 2 / Aloc1
But not higher than the following values:

+ When the force-putting diagram by the picutres 16a, c, d, e, h:
As for heavy concrete, small-particla concrete, light concrete:
Level higher than B7,5: ................................................................. 2,5
Leval at B3,5; B5; B7,5: ................................................................ 1,5
As for the light concrete and the bee-nest concrete at level B2,5
and lower: ............................................................................................... 1,2
+ When the force putting diagram by pictures 16b, d, g, it is not
dependent on the kinds and levels of concrete: ........................................... 1,0
R b , Rbt □ is taken like concrete structure (see section 7 of table 15);
Aloc2 □ the local compressing-resistant area calculated by the instructions

of the article 6.2.5.2.
6.2.5.2 The calculated Aloc2 includes even the areas symmetric to the compressed
area(Picture 16). At this point, it’s required to obey the following principles:
- When the local loading capacity impacts the whole width b of the
building component, the calculated area includes the sections with the
length not larger than b at each edge of the impacted area of the local
lloading capacity (Picture 16a);
- When the local loading capacity is set at the edge of the whole width of
the building component, the calculated area Aloc2 is equal to the area Aloc1
(Picture 16b);
- When the loading capacity is set at the bolstering points of the beam or
girder, the calculated area includes the section with the width equal to the
bolstering depth of the building component of the beam or girder and the
length not larger than a half of the distance between the beams and girders
in conjuntion with the examined beams and girders(Picture 16c);
125
- If the distance between the girders (beams) is larger than the twice of the
width of the building component, the width of the calculated area is equal
to the total width of girders (beams) and the twice of the width of the
building component(Picture 16d);
- When the local loading capacity is set at a corner of the building
component (Picutre 16e), the calculated area Aloc2 is equal to the local
compressed area Aloc1 ;
- When the local loading capacity is put on a part of length and a part of
width of the building component, the calculated area shall be like Picture
16f. When there are some loading capacities have the same characteristics
such that, the calculated area is limited by the lines crossing the central
point of the distance between the setting point of the adjacent loading
capacities ;
- When the local loading capacity is put on the convex section of the wall or
the wall part with the the T-letter vertical section , the calculated area
Aloc2 is equal to the local compressed area Aloc1 (Picture 16g);
- When defining the calculated aera for a complex vertical section, it’s not
necessary to calculate the area parts whose conjunction with the loading
area is not guaranteed with the required credibility (Picture 16h).
NOTE: With the local intensity due to girders, beams and other bending-
resistnat building components, when defining the area Aloc1 and Aloc2 , the
depth from the bolstering edge is taken no larger than 20 cm.
6.2.5.3 The calculation on the local compressing resistance of building components
made from heavy concrete having the indirect steel rod under form of
soldering steel net:
N ≤ Rb , red Aloc 1 (103)
In which:
Aloc1 □ the local compressing-resistant area;
Rb, red □ the converted prism intensity of conccrete in the calcutaiotn of the
local compmressing resistance is defined by the formula:
126
Rb, red = Rb ϕ b + ϕ μ xy Rs , xy ϕ s (104)
here: Rs , xy , ϕ , μ xy □ signaled as in the Article 6.2.2.13.
ϕ b = 3 Aloc 2 / Aloc1 (105)
But not larger than 3,5;

ϕs □ the coeficient examining the indirect steel rod area in the
local compressing-resistant zone, as for diagram of
picture 16b, e, g taking ϕ s = 1, in which the indirect steel
rod is put into calculation, with the condition that the
horizontal steel net must be put on the area not smaller
than the area limited by the interuptive line on the
correlative diagrams in Picture 16; as for Diagrams of
pictures 16a, c, d, f, the coeficient ϕ s is defined by the
formula :
Aloc1
ϕs = 4,5 − 3,5 (106)
Aef
here: Aef □ the concrete area is lying within the limited area by the
marginal bars of the steel net used as the indirect steel rod and must
satisfy the condition:
Aloc1 < Aef ≤ Aloc 2
a) b b Aloc1=Aloc2
Aloc1 Aloc2
)
b
b
b b
a
A
127
c) l/2 l/2 Aloc2 d a

b b
)
b
Aloc1
Aloc1 Aloc2
l ≤ 2b l ≤ 2b l > 2b l > 2b
e) f) Aloc2 Aloc1
A Aloc1=Aloc2
c1
b
a1
b
c 2≤ b c2≤ b
b1
c1
b1 a1 a
g A h
) ) Aloc2
b
b2
c1 c1
Aloc1
Aloc1=Aloc2
b2
Picture 16 □ Calculation Diagram of the concrete and steel

building components with the local compressing resistance.
a) when the local loading capcity is put on the whole width of the
buidling component; b) when the local loading capcity is put on the
whole width of the edge area of the buidling component; c, d) when
the local loading capcity is put at the beam or girder; e) when the
loading capactiy is put on a corner of the buidling component; f)
when the local loading capcity is put on a part of the width and a
part of the length of the buidling component or when the local
laoding capacity is put on the convex part of the wall or wall part; g)
when the local loading capcity is put on the wall pillar; h) the
vertical section having the complicated form
Aloc1 □ the local compressing-resistant area; Aloc2 □ the local
compressing- resistant calculated area; A □ the minimum area that
must put on the steel net, in which the indirect steel rod is mentioned
in the calculation by the formula (104)
128
B. Calculation on the holed compressing

6.2.5.4 The plate-form structure (with no horizontal steel rod put on) receiving the
impact of the force arranged evenly on a limited area should be calculated for
holed-compressing resistance by the condition:
F ≤ α Rbt u m h0 (107)
In which:
F □ holed-compressing force;
α □ coefficient, taken for:
+ Heavy concrete: .............................. 1,0

+ Small-particle concrete: .................. 0,85
+ Light heavy: .................................... 0,8
um □ the average value of the perimeter of the above bottom and the below
bottom of the holed-compressing tower formed upon getting holed
compressing, within the operating height of the vertical section.
When defining u m F , assuming that the holed compmressing occurring by
the inclining side of the tower has the small bottom which is the area
receiving impact of the holed-compressing force and the other sides incline a
corner of 45o compared with the horizontal direction (Picture 17a).
a) b)
F F
h0
45o 45o
h0
Picture 17 □ Calculation Diagram of the holed compressing for

the concrete and steel vertical section
a) when the side of the holed-compressing tower
inclines a corner of 45o, b) when the side of the holed-
129
compressing tower inclines a corner larger than 45o.
The holed-compressing force F is taken equal to the force impacting the

holed-compressing tower minus the loading capacity part against holed
compressing which impacts the bigger bottom of the holed-compressing
tower (taken at the plane which the pulling-resistant steel rod is put on).
If due to the bolstering diagram, the holed compressing only occurs at the side
of the tower which has the inclination higher than 45o (for example : in the
pillar estrade of picture 17b),the right side of the condition (107) is defined
for the practical holed-compressing tower multipling with h0 c . At that time,
this force-resistant ability is taken not bigger than the value collerative with
the holed-compressing tower with c = 0,4h0 , here c is the projection length of
the side of the holed-compressing tower on the horizontal direction.
When the belt steel rods is put perpendicular to the plate surface within the
scope of the holed-compressing tower, the calculation should be carried out in
accordance with the condition:
F ≤ Fb + 0 ,8 Fsw (108)
But not bigger than 2 Fb .
The inner force Fb is taken equal to the right side of the inequality (107),
while Fsw is the totality of the cutting force suffered by the belt steel rod
(cutting the sides of the tower), calculated by the formula:
Fsw = ∑ R sw A sw (109)
Here, Rsw mustn’t exceed the collerative value with the steel rod CI, A-I.
When examining the horizontal steel rod, Fsw is taken not smaller than 0,5Fb .
When arranging the belt steel rod on a limited part near the position of the
focus loading capacity, it’s needed to make additional calculations by the
condition(107) for the holed-compressing tower with the above bottom lying
along the perimeter of the part putting the horizontal steel rod.
130
The horizontal steel rod must statisfy the condition set in the Article 8.7.8.
C. Calculation on snatching and interupting
6.2.5.5 The concrete building component is snatched and interupted by the impact of
the loading capacity put at the below side or within the scope of vertical
section height (Picture 18) needs to be calculated by the condition:
⎛ h ⎞
F ⎜⎜ 1 − s ⎟⎟ ≤ ∑ Rsw Asw (110)
⎝ h0 ⎠
h0
F
hs
hs b hs
a
Picture 18 □ Calculation Diagram for Snatching and Interupting of

the concrete building component
In the formula (110):

F □ the snatching and interupting force
hs □ the distance from the position putting the snatching and interupting
force to the centre of gravity of the vertical section of the vertical
steel rod;
∑ Rsw Asw □l the total cutting force resisted by the belt steel rod put
subsidiarily on the snatched and interupted zone with the lenght a
equal to:
a = 2 hs + b (111)
here: b □ the width of the area transmiting the snatching and interupting
force.
The value hs and b is defined based on the characteristics and condition of
putting the snatching and interupting loading capacity on the building
component (put on console or adjacent building components, etc...).
131
D. Calculation on the breaking girders

6.2.5.6 When the deep-set part of the zigzag beam lies in the pulling-resistant zone,
it’s required to put the full horizontal steel rod to suffer:
n) The mixed force in the vertical steel rod doesn’t anchor with the
compressing-resistant zone:
β
F1 = 2 R s As1 cos (112)
2
a) 35% mixed force in all pulling-resistant vertical steel rod bars:
β
F2 = 0,7 Rs As1 cos (113)
2
According to the calculations from the above conditions, the horizontal steel
3
rod needs to be located on a place with the length s = h tg β (Picture 19).
8
The total projection of the mixed force from the horizontal steel rod bars (belt
steel rod) lying on this section on the bisector of the deep-set corner is not
smaller than (F1 + F2 ) , meaning that:
∑ Rsw Asw cosθ ≥ (F1 + F2 ) (114)
In the formulas from (112) to(114):

As □ the horizontal vertical section area of all pulling-resistant steel rod bars;
As1 □ the horizontal vertical section area of all pulling-resistant steel rod
bars which don’t anchor with the compressed zone;
β □ the deep-set corner in the pulling-resistant zone of the building
component;
∑ Rsw □ the total horizontal vertical section area of the horizontal steel rod in
the scope s ;
θ □ the inclining corner of the horizontal steel rod bar in compared with
the bisector of the corner β ;
NOTE:
1) The horizontal steel rods must embrace all pulling-resistant vertical steel
rods and anchor firmly with the compressed zone;
132
2) When the corner β ≥ 160o, it’s possible to put the vertical steel rod
suffering continuous pulling. When β < 160o some or all pulling-resistant
steel rods need to be put separately and anchored firmly with the compressed
zone.
s/2 s/2
3β/4
h
As1
h/2
As1
β
As θ As
Picture 19 – Calculation and composition of the snatching and interupting

girder
133
6.2.6 Calculation on the available-set details

6.2.6.1 The anchoring bars that are welded perpendicular to the flat steel plates of the
available-set details and impacted by the bending moment M , the N force
which are perpendicular to them and the Q force due to the static loading
capacity set in a place symmetric to the available-set details (Picture 20) need
to be calculated by the formula:
1
Q
M
z
N
1 1-1
Picture 20 □ Diagram of the inner force impacting the available-set

details
2
2 ⎛Q ⎞
1,1 N an + ⎜⎜ an ⎟⎟
⎝ λδ ⎠ (115)
Aan =
Rs
In which:
Aan □ the total vertical section area of the anchoring bars lying at the anchor
line suffering the biggest force;
Nan □ the biggest pulling force in one anchor bar:
M N
N an = + (116)
z nan
'
Q − 0,3 N an
Qan □ the slipping force transmitting to an anchor bar: Qan =
nan
(117)
′ □ the biggest compressing force in an anchor bar line, defined by the
Nan
formula:
134
' M N
N an = − (118)
z nan
In the formulas from (115) to (118): M , N , Q □ are respectively the

moment, the vertical force and the slipping force impacting the available-set
details; moment is defined for the axis lying on the edge flat surface of the
plate and crossing the gravity centre of all anchor bars;
nan □ the number of anchor bar lines along with the slipping force direction;
if it’s not assured to transmit the slipping Q evenly to all anchor bars,
no more than four anchor lines shall be included in calculation for the
slipping force Qan ;
z □ the distance between the marginal anchor bar lines;
λ □ the coefficient, defined by the formula (119) when the anchor bars
have the diameter of 8 mm to 25 mm; as for the heavy concrete, the
small-particle concrete at level from B12,5 to B50 and the light
concrete at level from B12,5 to B30, λ is defined by the formula:
4,753 Rb
λ= β (119)
(1 + 0,15Aan1 ) Rs
but not taken higher than 0,7; as for the heavy concrete and the small-
particle concrete at level bigger than B50, the coefficient λ is taken
as for level B50; as for the small-particle concrete at level bigger than
B30, it is taken as for the level B30;
here, R b , R s has the unit of measurement of MPa;
Aan1 □ the vertical section area of the anchor line at the biggest
pulling-resistant line, cm2;
β □ the coefficient, taken as follows:
+ As for the heavy concrete: taken equal to 1,0;

+ As for the small-particle the concrete of Group A: taken
equal to 0,8; Group B and Group C: taken equal to 0,7;
135
+ As of the light concrete: taken equal to ρ m 2300 ( ρ m □ the

average private quantity of, kg/m3);
δ □the coefficient,defined by the formula:
1
δ = (120)
1+ω
but not smaller than 0,15;

Nan
here: ω = 0,3 ′ > 0 (with compressing resistanc)
when Nan
Qan
N
ω = 0,6 ′ ≤ 0 (without compressing resistance)
when Nan
Q
If there is no the pulling force in teh anchor bars, the coefficient δ is taken
equal to 1.
The vertical section area of the anchor bars in the remaining lines must be
taken equal to the vertical section area of the most compressing-resistant line.
In the formulas (116) and (118), the force N is considered positive if its
direction goes from the available-set details outside (Picture 20), is
considered negative if its direction goes forward to the available-set details. If
′ and the slipping force Qan calculated by the formulas
the force Nan , Nan
from (116) to(118) have the negative value, they will be taken equal to Zero
in the formulas from (115) to (117) and (120). In addition, if Nan < 0, in the
′ = N.
formula (117), we take Nan
When arranging the available-set details on the upper surface(when pouring

concrete) of the building component, the coeefficient λ shall be decreased
′ is taken equal to Zero.
down to 20%, while the value Nan
6.2.6.2 In the availalbe-set details, there are anchor bars are welded slantingly at a
corner of 15o to 30o, these slanting anchor bars are considered to suffer the
slipping force (when Q > N , in which N is the snatching and interupting
force) by the formula:
136
Q − 0,3Nan
'
Aan,inc = (121)
Rs
In which:
Aan , inc □ the total vertical section area of the slanting anchor bars;
′ □ see the Article 6.2.6.1.

Nan
At that time, it’s required to add the perpendicular anchor bars, calculated by
the formula (115) with δ = 1 , and the value Qan is taken equal to 10% of the
slipping force value by the formula (117).
6.2.6.3 The structure of the uniting details should guarantee the anchor bars to work
according to the chosen calculation diagram. The parts outside the available-
set details and the welded uniting points should be calculated by the standard
of the steel structure design TCXDVN 338 : 2005. When calculating the
plates and the plates suffering the snatching and interupting force, it’s
assumed that they unite jointly with the perpendicular anchor bars. In
addition, the thickness of the available-set details which are welded with the
anchor bars need to be checked by the condition:
Rs
t ≥ 0, 25 d an (122)
R sq
In which:
d an □ the required diameter of the anchor bar by calculation;
Rsq □ the cutting-resistant calculation intensity of the steel plate, taken by
TCXDVN 338 : 2005.
In the case that the welded uniting kinds are used to increase the working area
of the plates when the anchor bars are pulled out of the plates and when there
are correlative basis, it’s possible to adjust the condition (122) for these
welded uniting points.
The thickness of the plates should also satisfy the requirement of the welding
technology.
137
6.3 Calculation on the tiring-resistant concrete and steel rod building

component
6.3.1 Calculation on the tiring-resistant concrete and steel rod building component
is made by comparing the pressure in concrete and steel rod with their
correlative tiring limit σ b, fat and σ s, fat .
The tiring limit of the steel rod σ b, fat is taken by multipling the calculation
intensity of the steel rod R b with the working condition coefficient of the
steel rod γ b1 ( γ b1 is taken by Table 15).
The tiring limit of the steel rod σ s, fat is taken by multipling the calculation
intensity of the steel rod R s with the working condition coefficient γ s3 of the
steel rod ( γ s3 is taken by Talbe 24). In the case of using the steel rod with
welding joints, the tiring limit σ s, fat can include the working condition γ s 4
( γ s 4 is taken by Table 25).
THE PRESSURE IN THE CONCRETE AND STEEL ROD ARE

CALCULATED AS FOR THE ELASTIC OBJECTS (BY THE
CONVERTED VERTICAL SECTION) GETTING THE IMPACT OF THE
EXTERNAL FORCE AND THE FORE-COMPRESSING FORCE P .
The unelastic deformation in the compressing-resistant zone of the concrete is
examined by decreasing the elastic moment of the concrete, taking the steel
converting coefficient of concrete α ′ equal to 25, 20, 15, 10 correlative for
the concrete levels B15, B25, B30, B40 and higher.
The coefficient α ′ = Es Eb′ , in which Eb′ □ is the conventional elastic
moment of the concrete when getting impact of the repeating loading
capacity. Eb′ is different from Eb , it is specific for the rate between the
pressure and the total deformation (including even the elastic deformation and
the extra deformation) of the concrete, agglomerated in the process of
receiving impact of intensity.
138
In the case if the condition (143) isn’t satisfied when replacing the value
Rbt , ser equal to the value Rbt , the converted vertical section area is defined,
with no examining the compressing-resistant zone of the concrete.
6.3.2 Calculation on the tiring building component by the vertical section
perpendicular to the vertical axis of the building component should be made
by the condition:
- As for the compressing-resistant concrete
σ b ,max ≤ σ b , fat = Rb γ b1 (123)
- As for the pulling-resistant concrete:
σ s ,max ≤ σ s , fat = Rs γ s 3 (124)
In the formulas (123) ; (124):
σ b, max , σ s , max □ the correlative biggest pressure in the compressing-resistant
concrete and in the pulling-resistant steel rod.
Rb □ the calculation intensity of the concrete;
Rs □ the calculation intensity of the pulling-resistant steel rod.
When there are welding joints of steel rod, in the formula (124):
σ s , fat = Rs γ s 3 γ s 4 .
In the examined zone of the compressing-resistant concrete, when there is the

impact of the repeating loading capacity, it’s needed to avoid occurance of the
pulling pressure.
It’s not necessary to calculate the tiring resistancy for the compressing-
resistant steel rod.
6.3.3 The tiring calculation on the inclining vertical section should be made by the
condition : the horizontal steel rod totally suffers the mixed force of the main
pulling pressure impacting along the length of the building component at the
gravity centre of the converted vertical section, at this point the pressure in the
horizontal steel rod is taken by multipling the calculation intensity R s with the
working conditiono coefficients γ s 3 and γ s 4 (Tables 24 and 25).
139
As for the building components with no the horizontal steel rod set, it’s
needed to obey the requirements described in the Article 7.1.3.1, but in the
formulas (144), (145) it’s needed to replace the calculation intensity of the
concrete Rbt , ser and Rb, ser with the calculation intensity Rbt and Rb which
were multipled with the working condition coeefficient γ b1 provided in Table
16.
7 Calculation on the concrete and steel-rod building components by the second-limit

status
7.1 Calculation on the concrete building component by the formation of crevice

7.1.1 General Principle
The building component of the concrete and steel rod are calculated by the
formation of crevice:
- Perpendicular to the vertical axis of the building component;
- Slanting to the vertical axis of the building component.
7.1.2 Calculation on the formation of the crevice perpendicular to the vertical
axis of the building component
7.1.2.1 As for the concrete and steed-rod building components which are bending-
resistant, pulling-resistant and compressing-resistant askew to the center of
the inner force on the perpendicular vertical section when forming the creive,
they are defined based on the following assumptions :
- The vertical section is still considered flat after being deformed;
- The relatively biggest long elasticity of the concrete fibre which is pulling-
resistant at the edge shall be equal to 2 Rbt ,ser / Eb ;
- The pressure in the compressing-resistant zone of concrete (if any) is
defined with inclusion of the elastic or unelastic deformation of concrete.
At that point, the unelastic deformation is included by decreasing the core
distance r (the distance from the gravity center of the converted vertical
section to the most far core point of the compressing-resistant zone), see
the Article 7.1.2.4;
140
- The pressure in the pulling-resistant zone of concrete is arranged evenly

R
and has the value equal to bt ,ser ;
- The pressure in the un-taut steel rod is equal to the total pressure algebra,
correlative with the deformation rate of the concrete surrounding it, and the
pressure caused by shrinking and magnectic deformation of the concrete;
- The pressure in the taut steel rod is equal to its total algebra of the fore-
pressure (it can be included with all damages) and the pressure correlative
with the deformation rate of the concrete surrounding it.
The instructions of this Article are not applied for the building components
getting the repeating loading capacity (see the Article 7.2.1.9).
7.1.2.2 When defining the inner force in the vertical section of the building
component with the taut steel rod without any anchor, on the length of the
pressure transmiting segmentation l p (see the Article 5.2.2.5) when making
calculations by the formation of crevice, it’s needed to consider the decrease
′ by multipling it with the
of the fore-pressure in the steel rod σ sp and σ sp
coefficinet γ s 5 by Point 5 in Table 23.
7.1.2.3 The calculation on the concrete and steel-rod building components with the
fore-pressure force compressed right to the center, receiving the pulling force
right to the center N should be made by the condition:
N ≤ N crc (125)
In which:
N crc □ the inner force on the vertical section perpendicular to the vertical axis
of the building component when forming the crevice, defined by the
formula:
Ncrc = Rbt, ser ( A + 2α As ) + P (126)
7.1.2.4 The calculation on the building components which are bending-resistant,
compressed askew to the center as well as pulled askew to the center by the
formation of crevice is made by the condition:
M r ≤ M crc (127)
In which:
141
Mr □ the moment by the external force lying on one side of the

reviewed vertical section to the axis parallel with the neutralizing axis
and crossing the core point furthest away from the pulling-resistant
zone of this vertical section;
M crc □ the cracking-resistant moment of the vertical section perpendicular to
the vertical axis of the building components while forming the
crevice, defined by the formula:
M crc = R bt ,ser W pl ± M rp (128)
here: M rp □ the moment due to the pressure force P to the axis used to
define M r ; the sign of the moment is defined on the basis of the
revolving direcition (‘plus’ when the revolving directions of M rp and
M r are site, ‘minu’ when they coincidence).
The pressure force P is considered as :
+ To the fore-pressure building component : the compressing
external force;
+ To the building component with the fore-pressure force : the
pulling external force and defined by the formula (8), in which the
value of σ s and σ s′ in the un-taut steel rod is taken by the
damaged value due to shrining by Point 8 of Table 6.
The value M r is defined as follows:
+ To the bending-resistant building component (Picture 21a):

Mr = M (129)
+ To the compressing-resistant building component askew to the

center (Picture 21b):
M r = N (e0 − r ) (130)
+ To the compressing-resistant building component askew to the

center (Picture 21c):
M r = N (e0 + r ) (131)
142
The value M rp is defined as follows:
- When calculating by the formation of crevice in the zone of pulling-

resistant vertical section by the external force, but compressing-resistant by
the fore-compressing force (Picture 21), is defined by the formula:
M rp = P e0 p + r ( ) (132)
- When calculating by the formation of crevice in the pulling-resistant zone

of the vertical section due to the fore-compressing force (Picture 22), is
defined by the formual:
(
M rp = P e0 p − r ) (133)
a) b)
A's N
A's
e0 – r
e0
x
1
r
M
e +r
e +r
1
h
x
r
h
e0p
e0p
2 2
h-x
h-x
As Rbt,ser As Rbt,ser
A's
c)
1
r
x
h
e0p+r
2
e0p
e0 + r
h-x
e0p
P
As Rbt,ser
N
Picture 21 Diagram on the inner force and the pressure diagram
on the horizontal vertical section of the building component when
calculating by the formation of the crevice perpendicular to the
vertical axis in the zone which is pulling-resistant due to the
external force, but compressing-resistant due to the fore-
compressing force
a – when bending; b – when compressing askew to center; c – when
143
pulling askew to the center;

1 – core point; 2 – the gravity center of the converted vertical section
In the formulas from (130) to (133):

r □ the distance from the gravity centre of the converted vertical section to
the core point furthest away from the pulling-resistant zone being
checked for formation of the crevice:
+ As for the building component compressed askew to the center,
the building component of the fore-pressure force shall be
bending-resistant as weel compressing-resistant askew to the
center, if satisfying the condition:
N≥P (134)
Then the value r is defined by the formula:
Wred
r =ϕ (135)
Ared
+ As for the pulling-resistant building component, if it doesn’t
satisfy the condition (134), then r is defined by the formula:
Wpl
r= (136)
(
A + 2α As + As' )
+ As for the bending-resistant building component without un-taut
steel rod, , r is defined by the formula:
W red
r = (137)
A red
In the formulas (135) and (136):
σb
ϕ = 1,6 − (138)
Rb,ser
But taken not smaller than 0,7 and not higher than 1,0;
here:
144
σ b □ the biggest pressure in the pulling-resistant zone of the concrete due to

the external force and the fore-pressure force, calculated as for an elastic
object by the converted vertical section;
W pl □ defined by the instructions at the Article 7.1.2.6;
α = Es Eb .
As for the assembling vertical sections of the composed structure and the
block structure which don’t use glue in the assembling chink, when
calculating them during the formation of the crevice (beginning to enlarge the
assembling chink), the value Rbt ,ser in the formulas (126) and (128) is taken
equal to Zerođược lấy bằng không.
A's Rbt,ser
h-x
e0p
r
2
h
x
e0p - r
1
N
As
Picture 22 – Inner Force Diagram and Pressure Chart in the vertical

section of the building component when calculating during the formation
of the crevice perpendicular to the vertical axis of the building
components in the pulling-resistant zone caused by the fore-compressing
force
1 – core point; 2 – gravity centre of the converted vertical section
7.1.2.5 When calculating during the formation of the crevice on the sections with
initial crevice at the compressing-resistant zone (See Article 4.2.9), the value
Mcrc to the pulling-resistant zone due to the impact of the external force is
defined by the formula (128) needs to be decreased an quantity
ΔMcrc = λMcrc .
The coefficient λ is defined by the formula:

⎛ 0,9 ⎞
λ = ⎜ 1,5 − ⎟ (1 − ϕ m ) (139)
⎝ δ ⎠
145
If the value λ is calculated negative, it’s taken equal to Zero.

In the formula (139):
ϕm – is defined by the formula (171) for the zone with the initial crevice,
but taken not smaller than 0,45.
y As
δ= (140)
h − y As + As'
But not higher than 1,4;
here: y – the distance from the gravity centre of the converted vertical
section to the marginal pulling-resistant concrete fibre due to the external
force..
As for the strucutres which place code by fibre steel and bar steel group A-VI,
AT-VII, the value δ calculated by the formula (140) is decreased to 15%.
7.1.2.6 The bending-resistant moment Wpl of the converted vertical section to the
marginal pulling-resistant fibre (included with the un-elastic deformation of

concrete in the pulling-resistant zone) is defined by the formula with the
assumption that there is no the verticla force N and the fore-compressing
force P :
W pl =
(
2 I b0 + α I s 0 + α I s' 0 )
+ S b0 (141)
h−x
The neutralizing axis position is defined from the condition:
(h − x) Abt
Sb' 0 + α S s' 0 − α S s0 = (142)
2
7.1.2.7 In the structures strengthened by the fore-pressure building components (eg:
bar), when defining the inner force on the vertical section of those building
components during the formation of crevice, the vertical section area of the
pulling-resistant zone without the fore pressure shall not be included in the
calculation.
7.1.2.8 When checking whether the structure loses force-resistant ability during the
same time of formation of crevice ( see 4.2.10), the inner force of the vertical
section when forming the crevice is defined by the formulas (126) and (128),
146
but replacing Rbt ,ser with 1,2 Rbt ,ser and the coefficient γ sp is taken equal to 1
(see Article 4.3.5).
7.1.2.9 The calculation by the formation of crevice when suffering the repeating
loading capacity is made by the condition:
σ bt ≤ Rbt ,ser (143)
In which: σ bt – the biggest pulling pressure (by the channel method) in

concrete is defined by the article 6.3.1.
The calculated pulling-resistant intensity of concrete Rbt ,ser in the formula
(143) must include the working condition coefficient γ b1 taken by Table 16.
7.1.3 Calculation by the formation of the crevice slanting to the vertical axis fo
the building component
7.1.3.1 The calculation by the formation of the slanting crevice should be made by
the condition:
σ mt ≤ γ b 4 Rbt ,ser (144)
In which:
γ b 4 – the working condition coefficient of concrete (Table 15), is defined
by the formula:
1 − σ mc / Rb, ser
γ b4 = (145)
0,2 + α B
But not bigger than 1,0;

Here:
α – coefficient, taken for:
Heavey concrete :............................................................ 0,01;
+ small-particle concrete, light concrete and bee-nest
concrete: ........................................................................... 0,02;
B – compressing-resistant durable level of concrete, MPa.
The value αB taken not smaller than 0,3.
147
The value of the main pulling and main compressing pressure in the concrete
σ mt and σ mc is defined by the formula:
σx +σy ⎛σ x −σ y ⎞
2
σ mt ( mc ) = ± ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ + τ xy
2 (146)
2 ⎝ 2 ⎠
In which:
σ x – the pressure in concrete on the vertical section perpendicular to the
vertical axis of building component caused by the external force and
the fore-compressing pressure force;
σ y – the pressure in concrete on the vertical section parallel to the vertical
axis of the building component caused by the local impact of the
leaning reactive power, the focus force and arranged loading capacity
as well as compressing force from the fore-pressure force of the belt
steel code and the slanting steel code;
τ xy – the continuing force in concrete caused by the external force and the
compressing force from the fore-pressure force of the slanting steel
code.
The pressure σ x , σ y and τ xy are defined as for the elastic objects, except for
the continuing pressure caused by the twisting moment which is defined by
the formulas for the plastic status of the building component.
The pressure σ x , σ y in the formula (146) have the ‘ plus’ sign if it is the
pulling pressure and have the ‘minus’ sign if it’s the compressing pressure.
The pressure σ mc in the formula (145) is taken by the absolute value.
The checking by the condition (144) is made at the gravity centre of the
converted vertical section and at the adjacent positions between the
compressing-resistant wing and the building component’s side with the
vertical section of T-letter or I-letter.
When calculating the building component using the taut steel rod without
anchor, it’s needed to consider the decrease of the fore-pressure force σ sp
148
′ on the length of the pressure transmtting section l p (see Article

and σ sp
5.2.2.5) by multipling with the coefficient γ s 5 by Point 5 of Table 23.
7.1.3.2 When there is the impact of repeating loading capacity, the calculation by the
formation of crevice should be made by the instructions in Article 7.1.3.1, in
which the calculation intensity of concrete Rbt ,ser and Rb ,ser , included with the
workding condition coefficient γ b1 taken by Table 6.
7.2 Calculation on the concrete and steel-rod bulding component by the

expansion of crevice
The concrete and steel-rod building component is calculated by the expansion
of crevice:
- Perpendicular to the vertical axis of the building component;
- Slanting to the vertical axis of the building component.
7.2.2 Calculation on the expansion of the crevice perpendicular with the vertical
axis of the building component
7.2.2.1 The width of the crevice perpendicular to the vertical axis of the building
component acrc , mm, is defined by the formula:
σs
acrc = δ ϕ l η 20 (3,5 − 100 μ )3 d (147)
Es
In which:
δ – the coefficient, taken for:
+ The bending-resistant and center-askew compressing building
component: equal to 1,0;
+ The pulling-resistant building component: equal to 1,2;
ϕ l – the coefficient, taken when there is the impact of:
+ The temporarily short-term loading capacity and the short-term

impact of the permanent loading capacity and the temporarily long-
term loading capacity: .........................................................................1,00;
149
+ The repeat loading capacity, the permanent loading capacity and the
temporarily long-term loading capacity for the structure made from:
Heavy concrete: in the condition of the natural moisture: ...... 1,6–15 μ
In the water stature status:

1,20
When the water stature status and the dry status alter
one another: 1,75
Small-particle concrete:
group A:
1,75
group B:
2,00
group C:
1,50
heavy concrete and empty concrete:
1,50
bee-nest concrete
..........................................................................................................
2,50
The value ϕ l for small-particle concrete, light concrete, empty concrete, bee-
nest concrete in the water stature status are multipled with the coefficient 0,8;
and when the the water stature status and the dry status alter one another, they
are multipled with the coefficient 1,2;
η – the coefficient, taken as follows:
+ With the bar steel rod with edge:..1,0

+ With the round and smooth bar steel rod: 1,3
+ With the fibre steel rod with edge and cable: 1,2
+ With the smooth steel rod:............1,4
150
σs – the pressure in the steel-rod bars at the outer layer S or (when there
is the fore-pressure force), the presusre number due to the impact of
the external force is defined by the instructions of the Article 7.2.2.2;
μ – the steel-rod contenet of the vertical section: is taken equal to the rate
between the steel-rod area S and the area of the concrete vertical
section (with the working height h0 and not included with the
compressing-resistant wing) but not larger than 0,02;
d – the steel-rod diameter, mm.
As for the building component with the level-2 crevice-resistant requirement,
the width of the crevice is defined with the permanent total, temporarily long-
term and temporarily short-term loading capacities with the
coefficient ϕl = 1,0 .
As for the building component with the level-3 crevice-resistant requirement,

the width of the long-term cevice is defined with the impact of the permanent,
temporarily long-term loading capacities with the coefficient ϕl > 1,0 . The
width of the short-term crevice is defined as the totality of the width of the
long-term crevice and the number of the width of crevice due to the impact of
the temporarily short-term crevice with the coefficient ϕl = 1,0 ;
The width of crevice is defined by the formula (147) re-adjusted in the

following cases
o) If the gravity centre of the vertical section of the steel-rod bars S at the
outer layer of the bending-resistant, center-askew compressing, center-
askew pulling building components with e0,tot ≥ 0,8h0 , lying the longest
distance of a2 > 0,2h far away from the pulling-resistant fibre, the value
acrc needs to be increased by multipling with the coefficient δ a equal to:
a2
20 −1
δa = h (148)
3
but it mustn’t be higher than 3.
151
p) As for the bending-resistant, center-askew compressing building components

made from the heavy concrete and light concrete with μ ≤ 0,008
and M r 2 < M 0 , the width of crevice due to the short-term impact of all
loading capacities allow to be defined by the linear interpolate between the
values acrc =0 correspondent with the crevice-causing moment Mcrc and the
value acrc is calculated according to the instructions of this article
correspondent with the moment M 0 = M crc + ψbh 2 R bt ,ser , (in which
ψ = 15μα /η ) but not bigger than 0,6. At that time, the width of the long-
term crevice due to the permanent loading capacity and the temporarily
long-term loading capacity is defined by multipling the found value acrc
due to the impact of all loading capacities with the rate
ϕ l1 (M r1 − M rp ) (M r 2 − M rp ) , in which:
q) ϕ l1 = 1,8ϕ l (Mcrc M r2 ) but not smaller than ϕ l .
here:
μ,η □ as well as in the formula (147);
Mr1 , Mr 2 □ the collerative moments M r due to the impact of the permanent,
temporarily long-term loading capacities and due to the total
loading capacity (see the Article 7.1.2.4).
c) As for the building component made from the light concrete and the empty
concrete at the level B7,5 and lower, the value acrc needs to be increased 20%.
7.2.2.2 The strain of tensioned reinforcement (or the strain increments) σ s must be
defined according to formulas to:
– Centrical tension member:
N−P
σs = (149)
As
– Part in bending:
(
M − P z − esp )
σs = (150)
As z
152
– Escentrical compressed member as well as escentrical compression as

eo, tot ≥ 0,8h0 :
σs =
(
N (es ± z ) − P z − esp ) (151)
As z
For escentrical tension member as e0,tot < 0,8h0 , value σ s need to define as
(151) z = z s (in which: z s – distance between reinforcement barycenters S
and S ′ ).
For a member without prestress, value of compressed prestress P is zero. In
formula (151), the lplus is taken to escentrical tension, the minus is taken
escentrical compression. If the position opf axis tension force N is in the
middle of reinforcement barycenters S và S ′ , value es is chosen by the minus
In formulas (150) and (151):

z – distance from barycenter of reinforcement cross-section area S to the
location of the resultant within compressed area of concrete section
above carack defined as points 7.4.3.2;
Upon tensioned reinforcement arrangement into many layers according to
cross-section height within part in bending, escentrical compression,
escentrical tension gets e0,tot ≥ 0,8h0 , strain σ s is calculated as formula (150)
và (151) must mutiply with δ n to have:
h − x − a2
δn = (152)
h − x − a1
in which x = ξh0 , value ξ is defined as formula 164);
a1 , a2 – corresponded it is distance from cross-section area barycenter of

total reinforcement S and of outermost reinforcement layer to the
most tensioned concrete layer
Strain value ( σ s + σ sp ) or many tensioned reinforcement ( δ nσ s + σ sp ) are not
allowed over Rs , ser .
153
On strain segments of initial crack within compressed area (refer point 4.2.9),
value of prestress P need to reduce a quantity ΔP that is defined as formula:
ΔP = λ P (153)
in which: λ is defined as formula (139).
7.2.2.3 The depth of initial hcrc within compressed area (refer 4.2.9) is not bigger
than 0,5 h0 . Value hcrc is defined as formula:
hcrc = h − (1,2 + ϕ m )ξ h0 (154)
Value ξ is defined asa formula (164), ϕ m calculated as formula (171) to the

initial cracked area
7.2.3 Calculation as the width of diagonal crack with longitudinal center of
strain
7.2.3.1 The width of diagonal crack as confinement reinforcement vuông góc with
longitudinal center of strain calculated as formula :
0,6 σ sw d w η
a crc = ϕ l
dw
Es + 0,15 Eb (1 + 2 α μ w )
h0
(155)
in which:
ϕ1 – coefficient is taken as follows:
+ Short-term provisional weight and short-term effect of frequent weight

and long-term provisional weight: ............................................................. 1,00
+ Repeated weight as well as long-term effect of frequent weight and
long-term provisional weight to structure that is made from:
heavy concrete:
in natural moisture condition:
1,50
in water saturated state:
1,20
154
upon alternating changes among water-anhydrous saturated state :

1,75
fine concrete, light concrete, hollow concrete, and cellular concrete:
taken as formular (147);
η – taken as formular (147);
d w – diameter of confinement reinforcement;
α = E S E b ; μ w = Asw bs .
the strain of confinement reinforcement as formula:
Q − Qb1
σ sw = s (156)
Asw h0
but not over R s,ser .

In formula (156):
Q and Qb1 – corresponded it is left-hand and right-hand side of condition
(84) but value R bt is made from coefficient γ b 4 multiply 0,8 instead of value
R bt ,ser
If there is no orthogonal crack within an area where is under shearing effect,

it meets conditions (127), which is mentioned sheering increase Qb1 by strain
followed a calculation of condition (144).
Calculates strength R bt ,ser và R b,ser is not over the comparative value of
concrete B30.
For strain which is made from light concrete B7,5 and lower, value acrc is
calculted formula (155) need to increase more 30%.
To define the width of short-term and long-term need to follow the
instructions of point 7.2.2.1 which mentions the long-term effected property
of weight
7.3 Calculation of reinforcement concrete strain as the close of crack

Reinforcement concrete strain must be calculted as the close of crack :
155
 perpendicular with longitudinal center of strain;

 oblique with longitudinal center of strain.
7.3.2 Calculation as the close of perpendicular crack with longitudinal center of
strain
7.3.2.1 To ensure the close of perpendicular crack with longitudinal center of strain
definitely under the effect of frequent weight and long-term provisional weigh
must follow the following conditions :
r) To avoid unrecoverable deformation in the tensioned steel S under the
effect of frequent weight and long-term provisional weight must follow
the following conditions:
σ sp + σ s ≤ 0,8 Rs , ser (157)
in which:
σ s – value of strain increments of tensioned steel S under the effect of
external force, defined as formulas from (149) to (151).
s) Cracked strain cross-section in tensioned area which is due to the effect of
frequent weight, long-term provisional weight and short-term provisional
weight needs always compressed under the effect of frequent weight and
long-term provisional weight and has a strain σ b at tension chord because
external force is caused not smaller than 0,5 MPa. Quantity σ b is defined
as elastic body under the effect of external force and precompressed force
7.3.2.2 For initial cracked strain segment within compressed area (refer 4.2.9), value
σ sp 9of formula (157) multiply with coefficient 1,1 (1 − λ ) , but not bigger
than 1,0 in which it is defined value λ as the instruction 7.1.2.5.
7.3.3 Calculation as the close of diagonal crack with longitudinal center of
strain
To ensure the close of diagonal crack with longitudinal center of strain
definitely, both main concrete strains which is defined as 7.1.3.1 at changed
centroid of a section undder the effect of frequent weight, long0term
provisional weight, must be compressed stress and get value bigger than 0,6
MPa.
156
The above request is ensured by prestressed cross reinforcement (confinement

or diagonal reinforcement).
7.4 Calculation of reinforcement concrete strain as deformation

7.4.1.1 Deformation (deflection, angle) of reinforcement concrete strain must
calculate as formulas of mechanics of structure, in which bending value is
defined as the instructions of points 7.4.1.2 and 7.4.3.
Deformated bending number of reinforced concrete structure is calculated
from their initial state and if there is a prestress, it should be calculated from
precompressed state.
Starin’s initial bending causes a stress by itself is defined by including content
and longitudinal reinforcement position to concrete section and concrete
precompressed force value
The bending is defined as follows:
t) Strain segment which has no an orthogonal crack with longitudinal center
of strain is considered as elastic body.
a) Stain segment which has an orthogonal crack with longitudinal center of
strain within tensioned area is defined as a ratio between average
deformated coefficient of outermost within concrete compressed area and
tensioned longitudinal center’s average deformation with the height of
strain section
Strains or strain segments is considered as without cracks within tensioned
area if the crack is not set up under the effect of frequent weight, long-term
provisional weight and short-term provisional weight or if the crack close
under the effect of frequent weight, long-term provisional weight, in which
weight base on relibility coefficient γ f = 1,0 for calculation
157
7.4.2 Defining the bend of reinforcement concrete strain on segments without

cracks within tensioned area
7.4.2.1 The strain segments have no orthogonal crack with longitudinal center of
strain, value of total bending of bending strain, escentrical compression and
escentrical tension need to defined as formula:
1 ⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞

= ⎜ ⎟ +⎜ ⎟ −⎜ ⎟ −⎜ ⎟ (158)
r ⎝ r ⎠1 ⎝ r ⎠ 2 ⎝ r ⎠3 ⎝ r ⎠ 4
in which :
⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞ – corresponded it is the bending due to short-term provisional
⎜ ⎟ ,⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠1 ⎝ r ⎠ 2
weight is defined as point

4.2.3) and due to frequent weight, long-term provisional weight (not included
prestressed force P ), defined as formula:
⎛1⎞ M ⎫
⎜ ⎟ = ⎪
⎝ r ⎠ 1 ϕ b1 E b I red ⎪
⎬ (159)
⎛1⎞ M ϕ b2 ⎪
⎜ ⎟ =
⎝ r ⎠ 2 ϕ b1 E b I red ⎪⎭
in which:
M – moment due to correlative external force (short-term and long-term)
to quadrature axis, effected plain of bending moment and crossing
changed centroid of a section;
ϕ b1 – coefficient related to the effect of concrete short-term creeping is
taken as follows:
+ For heavy concrete, fine concrete, light concrete with dense fine
aggregate, cellular concrete ( to two-layer prestressed structure
made from cellular and heavy concrete): it is 0,85;
+ For light concrete with cellular fine aggregate and hollow concrete:
it is 0,7;
ϕ b2 – coefficient related to the affect of concrete long-term creeping to no
crack deformated strain, taken as Table 33;
158
⎛1⎞ – the bending due to the rise of strain under short-term effect of
⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠3
precompressed stress P , defined as formula:
⎛1⎞ P e0 p
⎜ ⎟ = (160)
⎝ r ⎠ 3 ϕb1 Eb I red
⎛1⎞ – the bending due to the rise of strain which is due to concrete
⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠4
shrinkage and creeping under its compressed stress, defined as
formula:
⎛1⎞ ε b − ε b′
⎜ ⎟ = (161)
⎝ r ⎠4 h0
herewith:
ε b , ε b′ – Concrete’s comparative deformation is caused by concrete
shrinkage and creeping due to precompressed stress and defined
correspondedly at centroid of tensioned longitudinal
reinforcement and outermost compressed concrete layer as
formula (162):
σ sb σ sb
′
εb = ; ε b′ = (162)
Es Es
Value σ sb is the sum of total of loss prestress due to concrete

shrinkage and creeping defined as points 6, 8, 9 Table 6 to
′ is the same for stretched
reinforcement of tensioned area; σ sb
reinforcement if it is in or is not in outermost compressed
concrete layer.
P e0pϕ b 2
At that time, the sum of ⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞
⎜ ⎟ +⎜ ⎟ is taken not smaller than . For
⎝ r ⎠3 ⎝ r ⎠4 ϕ b1 E b I red
strain without prestress, the bending value ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ and ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ is zero.

⎝ r ⎠3 ⎝ r ⎠4
7.4.2.2 Upon defining the bending of initial cracked strain within compressed area
(refer 4.2.9), value ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ , ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ and ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ are defined as formulas (159), (160)

⎝ r ⎠1 ⎝ r ⎠ 2 ⎝ r ⎠3
159
which is increased 15%, and value ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ is defined as formula (161) need to

⎝ r ⎠4
increase 25%.
7.4.2.3 The areas in which have orthogonal crack within tensioned area but close
under the effect of given weight, the bending ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ , ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ and ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ in formula

⎝ r ⎠1 ⎝ r ⎠ 2 ⎝ r ⎠3
(158) increase 20%.
Table 33 - Coefficient ϕ b2 , under the effect of concrete long-term

creeping to deformation of no cracked strain
Long-term effect of weight Coefficient ϕ b2 , to structure made from;
Heavy concrete, light Fine concrete

concrete, hollow belong to group:
concrete, cellular
concrete, (to two-layer A B C
prestress structure made
from cellular and heavy
concrete)
1. Short-term affect 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2. Long-term affect as air
moisture of surrounding
environment: 2.0 2.6 3.0 2.0
a) 40% ÷ 75%
b) < 40% 3.0 3.9 4.5 3.0
Note:
1. Classification of fine concrete as group, refer point 5.1.1.3.
2. Alternating change of water-anhydrous saturated state, value ϕ b2 must multiply
with coefficient 1,2 under the long-term effect of weight.
3. The higher 75% of surrounding air moisture and concrete in water saturated
state, value ϕ b2 in item 2a of Table 33 must multiply with coefficient 0,8..
160
7.4.3 Definition of the bending of reinforcement concrete strain on cracked

segments within tensioned area
7.4.3.1 The areas where have set up orthogonal crack with longitudinal strain within
tensioned area, the bending of bending strain, escentrical tension as well as
escentrical compression with rectangular section, section of word T, section
of word I, with e0,tot ≥ 0,8h0 , need defined as formula:
1 M ⎡ ψs ψb ⎤ Ntot ψs
= ⎢ + ⎥− (163)
r h0 z ⎢⎣ Es As (ϕ f +ξ )bh0 Ebv⎥⎦ h0 Es As
in which:
M – moment to perpendicular with its effected plain and crossing
reinforcement centroid of section S, it is caused by external force
which is put at 1 side of given section and prestress P ;
z – distance from reinforcement centroid of section S to the contributive
place of forces within compressed area above crack is defined as the
instruction at point 7.4.3.2;
ψs – coefficient on concrete’s work within tensioned area of cracked
segments defined as point .4.3.3;
ψb – coefficient on unequal distribution of deformation of outermost
compressed concrete layer on the length of cracked segments is taken
as follows:
+ heavy concrete, fine concrete, higher light concrete B7,5: ..................... 0,9;
+ light concrete, hollow concrete, cellular concrete B7,5 and lower: ........ 0,7;
+ structure under affect of repeated weight and without depending on
concrete type and grade: ......................................................................... 1,0;
ϕf – coefficient is defined as formula (167);
ξ – comparative height of concrete within compressed area is defined as

point 7.4.3.2;
ν – typical coefficient, concrete elastoplastic state within compressed
area is taken as Table 34;
161
N tot – Composite of longitudinal force N and precompressed force P

(upon escentrical tension, force N is taken with the minus).
To strain without stretched reinforcement, force P is zero.
Upon defining the strain bending on initial cracked segment within
compressed area (refer 4.2.9), value P is decreased a quantity ΔP which is
defined as formula (153).
For bending strain and escentrical compression made from heavy concrete, as
( )
Mcrc < M r 2 < < Mcrc + ψbh 2 Rbt , ser , the bending which is due to moment M r 2
is defined as interpolate linearly among values:
 the bending since moment M crc is defined as continous elastic body as
points 7.4.2.1, 7.4.2.2, 7.4.2.3.
 the bending since moment (M crc +ψbh 2 R bt,ser ) is defined as the

instruction. Coefficient ψ is defined as the instruction at point 7.2.2.1b
and is decreased twice as included long-term effect of frequent weight
and long-term provisional weight.
Table 34 - Coefficient ν specificity of concrete elastopolytic state within

compressed area
Coefficientν , to strains made from:

Long-term effect of Heavy and Hollow Fine Cellular
weight light concrete concrete,group concrete
concrete
A B C
1. Short-term effect 0,45 0,45 0,45 0,45 0,45 0,45
2. Long-term affect as
air moisture of
surrounding
environment:
a) 40% – 75% 0,15 0,07 0,1 0,08 0,15 0,2
b) < 40% 0,1 0,04 0,07 0,05 0,1 0,1
162
Note:
1. Classification of fine concrete as group, refer point 5.1.1.3.
2. Alternating change of water-anhydrous saturated state, value ν must
multiply with coefficient 1,2 under the long-term effect of weight.
3. The higher 75% of surrounding air moisture and concrete in water
saturated state, value ν in item 2a of this Table must multiply with
coefficient 0,8..
7.4.3.2 Value ξ is calculated as formula:
1 1,5 + ϕ f
ξ= ±
1 + 5 (δ + λ ) es , tot
β+ 11,5 m5
10 μ α h0
(164)
but not bigger than 1,0.

Second term of right-hand of formula (164), taken the plus upon force Ntot to
be compression and taken the minus upon force Ntot to be tension (refer
7.4.3.1).
As formula (164):
β – coefficient taken as follows:
+ heavy concrete and light concrete: ........................ 1,8
+ fine concrete: ......................................................... 1,6
+ hollow concrete and cellular concrete: .................. 1,4
M
δ= (165)
bh02 Rb,ser
⎛ h'f ⎞
⎜
λ = ϕ f ⎜1 − ⎟ (166)
2 h ⎟
⎝ 0 ⎠
163
(b '
f )
− b h 'f +
α
2v
As'
ϕf = (167)
bh0
es ,tot – Escentry of force N tot to reinforcement centroid of section S ,

corresponded with moment M (refer 7.4.3.1), is defined as formula:
M
es ,tot = (168)
N tot
Value z is followed formula:

⎡ h 'f ⎤
⎢ ϕ f +ξ 2 ⎥
h
z = h0 ⎢⎢1 − 0 ⎥ (169)
⎢
2 ϕ f +ξ ⎥
⎥
( )
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦
 to escentrical compressed strain, value z is taken bigger than 0,97es, tot ;
 to rectangular or word T finned section strain within tensioned area, in

formula (166) and (169) replaced h′f by 2 a′ or h′f = 0 corresponded
with or without reinforcement S ′ ;
Finned sections within compressed area, ξ < h′f ho which is calculated as
rectangular section get the width of b′f .
Finned calculated width b′f is defined as the instruction at point 6.2.2.7.
7.4.3.3 Coefficient ψ s to strains which are made from heavy concrete, fine concrete,
light concrete and prestressed two-layer structure from cellular concrete and
heavy concrete is defined as formula:
1 −ϕm2
ψ s = 1,25 − ϕls ϕm − (170)
(3,5 −1,8ϕm )es,tot / h0
But not bigger than 1,0, in which es,tot / h0 ≥ 1,2 /ϕls
To non-prestressed bending strain, final term of right-handed formula (170) is

zero
In formula (170):
164
ϕ ls – coefficient which mention to the impact of long-term effect of weight

is taken as Table 35;
es, tot – refer formula (168);
Rbt , ser W pl
ϕm = (171)
± M r m M rp
But not bigger than 1,0;

here
Wpl – refer formula(141);
M r , M rp – refer point 7.1.2.4, in which moment is considered as the positive

if causing reinforcement tension
Table 35 - Coefficient ϕ ls
Coefficient
ϕ ls
coresponded
Long-term effect property of weight to concrete
grade
> ≤
B7,5 B7,5
1. Short-term effect as reinforcement is

a – bar steel with – plain 1,0 0,7
forms of – deformed 1,1 0,8
b – fibre steel 1,0 0,7
2. Long-term effect (independence of reinforcement 0,8 0,6
types)
To one-layer structure made from cellular concrete (non-prestress), value ψ s

is calculated as formula:
165
M
ψ s = 0,5 + ϕ l (172)
M ser
In which:
M ser – bending faculty of strain section as durability calculation with
calculated resistant of concrete and reinforcement as calculated as
second limiting state;
ϕl l – coefficient , taken as follows:
+ As short-term effect of weight to deformed reinforcement: ................... 0,6

+ As short-term effect of weight to plain reinforcement: .......................... 0,7
+ As long-term effect of weight which is not dependent on steel bar
section shape: ......................................................................................... 0,8
Strain of fatigue, value ψ s of all cases is 1,0
7.4.3.4 The total bend 1 to cracked segments within tensioned area need to define as
r
formula:
1 ⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞ ⎛1⎞
= ⎜ ⎟ −⎜ ⎟ +⎜ ⎟ −⎜ ⎟ (173)
r ⎝ r ⎠1 ⎝ r ⎠ 2 ⎝ r ⎠3 ⎝ r ⎠ 4
In which:
⎛1⎞ – The bend due to short-term effect of whole weight used for
⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠1
calculation is deformation follows the instruction as point 4.2.11;
⎛1⎞ – the bend due to short-term effect of frequent weight and long-term
⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠2
provisional weight;
⎛ 1 ⎞ – the bend due to long-term effect of of frequent weight and long-term
⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠3
provisional weight;
⎛1⎞ – the rise due to concrete shrinkage and creeping under precompression
⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠4
P , is defined as formula (161) and follows the instruction of point
7.4.2.2.
166
The bends of ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ , ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ and ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ is defined as formula (163), in which ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟

⎝ r ⎠1 ⎝ r ⎠ 2 ⎝ r ⎠3 ⎝ r ⎠1
and ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ are calculated with value ψ s và ν coresponded to long-term effect

⎝ r ⎠2
of weight. If value of ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ and ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ is the negative, it is zero.

⎝ r ⎠2 ⎝ r ⎠3
7.4.4 The rise definition

7.4.4.1 The rise f m due to cause of bending deformation is defined as formula:
l
⎛1⎞
fm = ∫ M x ⎜ ⎟ dx (174)
0 ⎝ r ⎠x
In which:
M x – bending moment at section x due to the effect of unit force which is
laid defined displacement direction of strain at section x on span
length which wants the deflection;
⎛1⎞
⎜ ⎟ – total bending at section x because weight causes the deflection need
⎝ r ⎠x
to define; value 1 is defined as formulas (158), (173) corresponded to
r
the segments which is with or without crack; the sign of 1 is taken so

r
as to be appropriate to bending charts.
Strain (no stretched reinforcement) bended with non-changed section, cracked
on bending moment segments without a sign change allows a calculation of
bending to the section of biggest strain. And the bending of the rest sections
on that segment is taken a ratio with bending moment value (pic 23).
7.4.4.2 Bending strain as l h < 10 must include cutting force affect to the deflection.
In this case, total deflection f tot is the sum of deflection due to bending f m
and deflection of shearing deformation f q .
167
a)
b)
c)
Pic 23 – Bending moment and the bend chart to steel reinforcement

strain which non-changed section
a – weight diagram; b – bending moment chart; c – the bend chart
7.4.4.3 The deflection f q due to shearing strain is defined as formula:
l
f q = ∫ Q x γ x dx
0
(175)
In which:
Q x – cutting force of section x due to unit force effects as defined

displacement direction and lays at section which wanted to define
deflection;
γx – shearing strain, need to define as formula:
1,5 Q x ϕ b 2
γx = ϕ crc (176)
G b h0
Here:
Qx – cutting force of section x due to effect of external
force;
G – Concrete shearing modular
ϕb 2 – coefficient under a consideration of the effect of concrete long-
term creeping, taken Table 33;
168
ϕ crc – coefficient under a consideration of the effect of crack on

shearing strain, taken as follows:
+ On segments along strain length without orthogonal crack
and diagonal crack with longitudinal center of strain is 1,0;
+ On diagonal cracked segments with longitudinal center of
strain is 4,8;
+ On orthogonal crack segments or simultaneous orthogonal
crack and diagonal crack with longitudinal center of strain,
taken as formula:
3 Eb I red ⎛1⎞
ϕ crc = ⎜ ⎟ (177)
Mx ⎝ r ⎠x
⎛1⎞
here M x , ⎜ ⎟ – corrsesponded it is a moment due to
⎝ r ⎠x
external force and total bend at section x because weight
causes the deflection.
7.4.4.4 Solid plate which has thickness smaller than 25 cm (not included edge
supported slab) is laid flat steel grid and got crack within tensioned area,
deflection value is calculated as formula (174) and must multiply with
3
coefficient ⎛ h0 ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ , but not bigger than 1,5 ( h0 by cm).
⎝ h0 − 0,7 ⎠
7.4.4.5 Calculation of one-layer reinforcement strain (pic 24) by finite element

method (or other mathematic methods), allows to use the following
symmetric physical equation instead of equation (163):
1 ⎫
= B 11 M + B 12 N ⎪ (178)
r ⎬
ε 0 = B 12 M + B 22 N ⎪⎭
In which:
M = M act m Pe0 p (179)
N = m N act − P (180)
169
1 ⎡ ψb ψs ⎤
B11 = ⎢ + ⎥ (181)
(zs + zb )2 ( ) ~
⎣⎢ ϕ f + ξ bh0 Ebν Es As ⎥⎦
1 ⎡ψ s z b ψ b zs ⎤
B12 = ⎢ − ~⎥ (182)
(zs + zb )2 ( )
⎣⎢ Es As ϕ f + ξ bh0 Ebν ⎦⎥
1 ⎡ ψ b zs2 ψ s zb2 ⎤
B22 = ⎢ + ⎥ (183)
(zs + zb )2 ( ) ~
⎣⎢ ϕ f + ξ bh0 Ebν Es As ⎦⎥
ν~ = 2ν (184)
ε0 – Elongation or shortening along axis y;
M act – Moment due to external force on given section’s one-side to axis y;
N act – longitudinal force at axis y, taken “the plus” upon causing tension;
z s , zb – corresponded it is distance from axis y to tensioned reinforcement

location of and to the resultant in compressed concrete;
ξ – is defined as point 7.4.3.2;
ν – Coefficient, taken as table 34;
ϕf – Coefficient, defined as formula (167) not included reinforcement
within compressed area of section;
ψs – defined as point 7.4.3.3;
ψb – defined as point 7.4.3.1.
Axis y is in the limit of section operating height with the aim of design
diagram simplification. If axis y is in the higher position to centre of section
area of compressed area, quantity zb is the negative
170
σb
σb Ab
zb
N
y
σs A s
zs
Pic 24 – Internal force diagram and stress chart on perpendicular
section with longitudinal center of strain with one-layer reinforcement
upon calculation as deformation
To second term in formula (179), the “minus” is taken if force P is lower

than axis y, whilst if force P is higher than axis y, the “plus” is taken
To first term in formula (180), the “plus” is taken if force N act is tension, and
the “minus” is taken if force N act is compression.
7.4.4.6 Upon strain calculation with many layers of reinforcement (pic 25), we
should use set of general physical equation:
1 ⎫
M = D11 + D12 ε 0
r ⎪⎪
⎬ (185)
1 ⎪
N = D12 + D22 ε 0
r ⎪⎭
in which:
~
( ) bhψ0 E b v z b2
n E si k
D11 = Σ Asi z si2 + Σ E sj Asj' z sj2 + ϕ f + ξ1 (186)
i =1ψ si j =1 b
~
( )bhψ0 Eb v zb
n E si k
D12 = Σ Asi z si + Σ E sj Asj' z sj + ϕ f +ξ1 (187)
i =1ψ si j =1 b
bh 0 E b v~
Σ E sj Asj + (ϕ f )
n E si k
D 22 = Σ Asi + '
+ ξ1 (188)
i =1ψ si j =1 ψb
with
i – ordinal of tensioned longitudinal reinforcement bar;
171
j – ordinal of compressed longitudinal reinforcement bar;

x
ξ1 – compressed area’s relativistic height of section is ξ1 = ;
h01
ϕf – is taken as formula (167) not included reinforcement S ′ ;
z si , z sj – distance from medium center i and j to axis y.
In formula (187) value z si , z sj , zb is taken the positive if it is under axis y,

vice versa it is the negative.
σsc1 A's1
σb A b
σscj A'sj
σsck A'sk
h01
xb
M
zsj
N
σsn Asn zsi y
σsi Asi
σs1 As1
Hình 25 Internal force diagram and stress chart on perpendicular

section with longitudinal center of strain with many layer
reinforcement upon calculation as deformation
Value ξ1 and ψ si in equations (186), (188) is defined as points 7.4.3.2 và

h − 1,3x
7.4.3.3, but in calculation formulas h0 is h01 , As is ∑ Asi h0i − 1,3x (as
01
defined μ ) and ϕ m is ϕ m1 = ϕ m (h01 h0i )
8 Construction requirements
8.1 General requirements

Upon design of concrete and reinforcement concrete structure, to ensure
conditions of construction, life-span and simultaneous operation of
reinforcement and concrete need to follow construction requirements showed
in this part.
172
8.2 Minium dimension of strain section

8.2.1 Minium dimension of concrete and reinforcement concrete strain section is
defined calculations of effected external force and corresponded limiting state
and need a selection including requirements of economy, neccessity of
formwork unification and method of putting reinforcement as well as
conditions of strain production technology.
Besides, reinforcement concrete strain section dimension need selected so as
to ensure requirements of reinforcement arrangement within section
(reinforcement cover thickness, distance among reinforcement bars) and
reinforcement holdfast.
8.2.2 The thickness of monolithic plate is not smaller than:
 To camp ceiling: ............................................................... 40 mm
 To floor and public works: ............................................... 50 mm
 To intermediate floor of producer: ................................... 60 mm
 To a plate made from light concrete B7,5 and lowers: .... 70 mm
The thickness of precast plate is defined from ensured conditions of required
thickness of concrete cover and conditions of reinforcement arrangement on
plate thickness (refer from point 8.3.1 to point 8.4.2).
Section dimensions of escentrical compressed strain need selected so that the
slenderness l0 / i is followed as any directions but is not allowed over:
 To reinforcement concrete strain made from heavy concrete, fine concrete

and light concrete: ........................................................................200
 To house-pillar: .................................................................................120
 To concrete strain made from heavy concrete, fine concrete, light concrete
and hollow concrete: ......................................................................90
 To concrete strain and reinforcement concrete made from cellular concrete:
.........................................................................................................70
173
8.3 Concrete cover

8.3.1 Concrete cover for forced reinforcement need ensured simultaneous operation
of reinforcement and concrete in operating periods of structure as well as
reinforcement protection out of the impact of air, temperature and other
similar impacts.
8.3.2 To force longitudinal reinforcement (non-prestress, prestress, tensioned
prestress on base), the thickness of concrete cover need taken not smaller than
reinforcement or cable diameter and not smaller than:
 In plate and wall get the thickness:
+ from 100 mm below/under: ......... 10 mm (15 mm)
+ over 100 mm:................................ 15 mm (20 mm)
 In beam and spandrel beam have the height:
+ Smaller than 250 mm: .................. 15 mm (20 mm)
+ Bigger or equal 250 mm: ............. 20 mm (25 mm)
 In pillar: .................................................... 20 mm (25 mm)
 In foundation beam: .................................................30 mm
 In foundation:
+ Precast: .......................................................30 mm
+ Monolith with line concrete: .......................35 mm
+ Monolith without line concrete: ..................70 mm
Note:
1. Value in brackets (...) applied for outdoor structure or moisture places.
2. To structure within effected area of sea environment, the thickness of
concrete cover taken as current standard regulation TCXDVN 327 : 2004.
In one-layer structure made from light concrete and hollow concrete 7,5 and
lower, the thickness of concrete cover is not smaller than 20 mm, and the
outer wall panel (without coat) is not smaller 25 mm.
To one-layer structure made from cellular concrete, in cases, concrete cover is
not smaller than 25 mm.
174
Within area under the effect of saline steam, the thickness of concrete cover
should follow current similar standard regulation.
8.3.3 The concrete cover thickness to confinement reinforcement, distribution
reinforcement and distribution-bar reinforcement need taken not smaller than
diameter of these reinforcement and not smaller than:
 Strain section height is smaller than 250 mm: ............. 10 mm (15 mm)
 Strain section height is 250 mm and over: .................. 15 mm (20 mm)
Note:
1. Value in brackets (...) applied for outdoor structure or moisture places.
2. To structure within effected area of sea environment, the thickness of
concrete cover taken as current standard regulation TCXDVN 327 : 2004.
In one-layer structure made from light concrete and hollow concrete is not
bigger 7,5 and made from cellular concrete, the thickness of concrete cover to
cross conrete is not smaller than 15 mm and does not depend on section
height
8.3.4 The thicknees of concrete cover at the end of prestress strains along the length
of strain diffused segments (refer 5.2.2.5) is not smaller than:
 To aluminum bar ironCIV, A-IV, A-IIIB: ........................................ 2 d
 To aluminum bar iron A-V, A-VI, AT-VII: ..................................... 3 d
 To cable reinforcement: ..................................................................... 2 d
( d by mm).
Besides, the thickness of concrete cover in above area is not smaller than 40
mm to types of bar reinforcement and 30 mm to cable reinforcement.
Concrete cover of anchor or non-anchor stretched reinforcement at supporting
section is allowed taken as span section in the following cases:
u) Prestressed strains which have centralized diffused bearing force, steel
support details and indirect reinforcement (cross reinforcement to be
welded wire net or longitudinal reinforcement surrounding confinement
reinforcement) are laid as the instructions in point 8.12.9.
175
b) In the plate, panel, trong các bản, panen, sheeting and và column
foundation of the electrical transmission line, upon laying cross-
reinforcement to add the strain end (steel net, closed confinement
reinforcement) must follow the regulation at 8.12.9.
8.3.5 Strains which have prestress longitudinal reinforcement stretched over
concrete and in steel duct, the distance from strain surface to duct surface is
smaller than 40 mm and not smaller than the width of steel duct. Besides,
above distance to strain side-surface is not smaller than 1/2 of height of steel
duct.
Upon arrangment stretched reinforcement in open slot or section outside, the
thickness concrete cover is set up and then by grouting method or other
method must not be smaller than 30 mm
8.3.6 To ensure laying reinforcement bars, wire net, or wire frame into formwork
easily along the total length (the widthwise) of strain, the end of this
reinforcement bar need laid far from the strain edge a distance :
 To strain of dimension under 9 m: .............................................. 10 mm
 To strain of dimension under 12 m: ............................................ 15 mm
 To strain of dimension bigger 12 m: ........................................... 20 mm
8.3.7 In box section, distance from longitudinal reinforcement bar to inside surface
of strain must meet requirement at points 8.3.2 và 8.3.3.
8.4 Minium distance among reinforcement bars

8.4.1 Uncovered distance among reinforcement bars (or jacket of stretched
reinforcement) as the strain height and width must ensure simultaneous
operation between reinforcement and concrete and be selected including the
convinience as pouring and mortar pickle. Prestress structure also need to
include the partial compression level of concrete, dimension of tensioned
equipments (jack screw, clamp). Strains using platform vibrator and reedle
vibrator upon being produced need to ensure the distance among
reinforcement bars which vibrator goes through for tightening concrete
mortar.
176
8.4.2 Uncovered distance among non-stretched longitudinal reinforcements or

stretched reinforcement which is tensioned on base as well as distance among
bars in juxtapose welded steel frames are not smaller than the biggest
reinforcement bar’s diameter and are not smaller than the following
prescribed numberic value:
v) Upon pouring concrete, reinforcement bars which get horizontal or oblique
position must not be smaller: a1. to lower reinforcement: it is 25 mm; to
upper reinforcement: it is30 mm. If lower reinforcement is arranged more
than two layers as the height, distance among bars as horizontal direction
(except bars of 2 lowermost layers ) are not smaller 50 mm.
c) Upon poring concrete, reinforcement bars which get orthotropic position is
not smaller 50 mm. Upon controlling dimension of concrete aggregate
systematically, this distance can reduce to 35mm but is not smaller 1,5time
of the biggest dimension of raw aggregate
In narrow condition, allowed to arrange reinforcement bars as couple (without
open slot among them).
Stretched reinforcement strains which is stretched on concrete (except
structure is laid continous reinforcfement), distance among steel ducts is not
smaller than duct diameter and not smaller than 50mm in cases.
Note: distance among deformed reinforcements is taken as danh định
diameter, nnot including steel edge .
8.5 Stretched reinforcement holdfast

8.5.1 To deformed reinforcement and plain round bars used welded steel-frame, the
end must be straight and no hook-bended. The tensioned plain round bars
used in frame or net must be hook-bended under form of L or U word
8.5.2 Tensioned longitudinal reinforcement bars and compressed reinforcement
need to last more through section which is perpendicular with longitudinal
center of section in which they are calculated with the whole of intensity
which is not smaller than l an ad defined as formula:
⎛ R ⎞
lan = ⎜⎜ ω an s + Δλan ⎟⎟ d (189)
⎝ Rb ⎠
177
but not smaller than l an = λan d .
Therein value ω an , Δλan và λan and minium value l an are defined as table
36. Plain round reinforcement bars must have hooks at the end or be welded
with confinement reinforcement along the holdfast length. To count value Rb
must include coefficient of concrete operating condition except coefficient
γ b2 .
Strains made from fine concrete belong to group B, the length l an in formula
(189) must increase 10d to tensioned reinforcement and 5d compressed
reinforcement .
In case that bars must have holdfast get section area bigger than requested
area as durability with whole of calculated intensity, the length l an in formula
(189) is reduced by multiplying with essential ratio as calculation and actual
area of reinforcement section.
As calculation, along with holdfatsed bars which creates cracks because
concrete is tensioned, these bars must last more into compressed area one
segment l an calculated as formula (189).
If impossible to perform above request, it must have solutions to holdfast

longitudinal reinforcement bars so as to ensure that they can operate with the
whole of calculated intensity at given section (laying indirect reinforcement,
welding the end of holdfast plate or available details, bending folded holdfast
bars), the length l an is not smaller than 10d .
To available details, we must note the following special points: tensioned

holdfasted bar length of available details which is buried into tensioned and
compressed concrete area as σ bc Rb > 0,75 or σ bc Rb < 0,25 must be
defined as formula (189) with values ωan , Δλan và λan taken as item 1a table
36 the rest cases these values need taken as item 1b table 36. In which σ bc is
compressed stress in concrete which affect to holdfasted bar perpencularly,
defined as elastic materials on changed section under frequent weigh with
reliable weight coefficient γ f = 1 .
178
Holdfasted bars tensioned and sheared available details, left-hand side of

formula (189) multiply with coefficient δ and defined following formula:
0,3
δ = + 0,7 (190)
1 + Qan1 N an1
in which : N an1 , Qan1 – corresponded, it is tension and cutting force in
holdfasted bar
And holdfasted bar length must not be smaller tha minium value l an mentioed
in this part .
Holdfast made from plain round steel group CI, A-I is used only when there is
a reinforment at the bar end by steel plate or plimming at the bar end or
welding short segments which go cross bars. Holdfast bar length is calculated
an evulsion and concrete partial compression and allowed to use holdfast
which made from above steel with hook at the bar end for construction details
Table 36 – Coefficient to define holdfast segment of non-stretched

reinforcement
Coefficients to define holdfast segment

of non-stretched reinforcement
Deformed Plain
Operationg condition of reinforcement reinforcement
non-stretched reinforcement
ω an Δλan λan lan , ω an Δλan λan lan ,
mm mm
Not Not
smaller smaller
1. holdfast segment of reinforcement
a. Tension in tensioned concrete 0,7 11 20 250 1,2 11 20 250
b. Compression or tension in compressed
area of concrete 0,5 8 12 200 0,8 8 15 200
2. Linkage on reinforcement
a. In tensioned concrete 0,9 11 20 250 1,55 11 20 250
b. In compressed concrete 0,65 8 15 200 1 8 15 200
179
8.5.3 To ensure holdfasting all longitudinal reinforcement bars tensioned into

supported edge and at outermost free support of bending strain must follow
the following requests:
w) If condition 6.2.3.4 is ensured, length of tensioned reinforcement bar
segment is tensioned into free support is not smaller than 5 d .
x) If condition 6.2.2.4 is not ensured, length of tensioned reinforcement bar
segment is tensioned into free support is not smaller than 10 d .
Length of holdfast segment l an of outermost free supports where
reinforcement calculated intensity is reduced (refer 5.2.2.4 and Table 23), is
defined as the instructions in points 8.5.2 and item 1b table 36.
Upon laying indirect reinforcement, length of holdfast segment is reduced by
dividing coefficient ωan to quantitive 1 + 12 μ v and reduce coefficient Δλan a
quantitive of 10σ b / Rb .
in which:
μ v – Reinforcement content as volume defined as follows:
+ with welded steel net, calculated as formula (49), refer 6.2.2.13;

+ With folding confinement reinforcement, calculated as formula:
Asw
μv =
2as
in which:
Asw – Section area of folding confinement reinforcement lays as strain-edge .
In cases, value μ v is taken not bigger than 0,06.

Concrete stress on support σ b is defined by dividing supported rocket to
leaned area of strain and not bigger than 0,5 Rb .
Indirect reinforcement is distributed on the length of holdfast segment, from

the strain end to orthogonal crack which is nearest to support.
The length of holdfast segment which is tensioned into support is reduced
compared with requested length in this part if value l an < 10d and is taken by
180
l an but not smaller than 5 d . In this cae as well as upon welding certainly the
bar end with steely available holdfast details, calculated intensity of
longitudinal reinforcement at support is not neccesary to reduce.
8.6 Longitudinal reinforcement arrangement for strain

8.6.1 Section area of longitudinal reinforcement in reinforcement concrete strain
need taken not smaller than given values in Table 37.
Table 37 – Minium section area of longitudinal reinforcement in

reinforcement concrete strain, % concrete section area
Minium section area of

longitudinal reinforcement in
Operating condition of reinforcement
reinforcement concrete strain, %
concrete section area
1. Reinforcement S in bending strain and
escentrical tension upon longitudinal force
out of limit of section operating height 0,05
2. Reinforcement S , S ′ in escentrical
tensioned strain upong longitudinal force is
between reinforcements S and S ′ 0,06
3. Reinforcements S , S ′ in escentrical
compressed strain upon:
l0 / i < 17 0,05
17 ≤ l0 / i ≤ 35 0,10
35 < l0 / i ≤ 83 0,20
l0 / i > 83 0,25
Note: Minium reinforcement section area in this table is for concrete section area
calculated by multiplying the width of rectangular section or the width of T (I)
section loop with operating height of section h0 . Strains whose longitudinal
reinforcement laid as section perimeter evenly as well as centrical tensioned
strains, minium reinforcement value given above is for overall area of concrete
section.
181
Strains whose longitudinal reinforcement is arranged as section perimeter

evenly as well as centrical tensioned strains, minium reinforcement section
area of overall longitudinal reinforcement need taken double given valueable
37.
Minium content of reinforcements S and S ′ in escentrical compressed strain
whose forced capacity to calculated escentre which is used not over 50% and
is 0,05 if no dependence on strain slenderness .
Regulations in Table 37 is not applied as selection of reinforcement section
area and strain calculation in transportation and manufacture process; in this
case, reinforcement section area is defined by durability calculation. If
calculation shows forced capacity of strain is lost and the establish of crack
within concrete of tensioned area at the same time, we must consider the
requests of point 4.2.10 for strain of less reinforcement.
It is not necessary to consider the regulations in this part as definition of
reinforcement area laid as plate perimeter or panel as bending calculation in
the plate flat (panel).
8.6.2 Longitudinal reinforcement diameter of compressed strain is not over value:
 To heavy concrete , fine concrete with garde lower than B25: . 40 mm
 To light concrete, hollow concrete with garde:
+ B12,5 down .................................................................... 16 mm
+ B15 – B25:...................................................................... 25 mm
+ B30 up ............................................................................ 40 mm
 To cellular with grade:
+ B10 down ....................................................................... 16 mm
+ B12,5 – B15:................................................................... 20 mm
Bending strains made from light concrete using reinforcement of group CIV,
A-IV and lower, longitudinal reinforcement diameter is not over:
 To concrete with grade B12,5 down: .......................................... 16 mm
 To concrete with grade B15 – B25:............................................. 25 mm
182
 To concrete with grade B30 up: .................................................. 32 mm

To reinforcement of higher group, limiting diameter of reinforcement bar ,ust
fix to current regulations
To bending strain made from cellular with grade B10 and lower, longitudinal
reinforcement diameter is not bigger than 16 mm.
Longitudinal reinforcement diameter in escentrical compressed strain of
monolithic pouring structure is not smaller than 12 mm.
8.6.3 In escentrical compressed straight strain, distance between axis and
reinforcement bars which along perpendicular position with bending flat is
not smaller than 400 mm, and as bending flat position is not smaller than 500
mm.
8.6.4 Escentrical compressed strain whose forced capacity is crresponded to given
escentre of longitudinal force is used smaller than 50%, strains with
slenderness l0 / i <17 (ex: short column) which is no request to lay compressed
reinforcement as calculation and no over 0,3% for tensioned steel quantity is
allowed not to lay longitudinal reinforcement and cross reinforcement (as
regulated at points 8.6.3, 8.7.1, 8.7.2) on edges paralleled with bending flat. At
that time, on the perpendicular edges with bending flat, we need to arrange
welded steel frame, steel net with concrete cover no smaller than 50mm and
twice of longitudinal reinforcement diameter.
8.6.5 Beams have the width is bigger than 150 mm, number of forced longitudinal
reinforcement is tensioned into support not to be less 2 bars. Spandrel whose
precast panels and beam whose width of 150mm down are allowed to pull
into support 1 forced longitudinal reinforcement bar.
In floor plate, distance among reinforcement bars which are pulled into
support is not over 400 mm, and section area of these reinforcement bar is
not smaller than 1/3 section area of reinforcement bars of span which is
defined as biggest bending moment.
In prestressed plate with hollow holes (round hollow holes) made from heavy
concrete and have the height to be smaller 30mm, distance among stretched
reinforcements which laid into support is increased to 600mm. If section
183
which is perpendicular with longitudinal axis, moment value table which

caused cracks M crc is defined as formula (128) and not smaller 80% of
moment value due to external force calculated with reliable cofficient of
weight γ f = 1 .
Upon laying reinforcement for continuous plate by roll welded nets, we get a
permission to bend the whole of reinforcement bars which are part below of
net, onto the segment where is near to intermediate support .
Distance between axis of forced reinforcement bars at the part of middle of
span and over leaned support (upper bar) is not bigger than 200 mm, if plate
thickness is smaller or equal 150 mm and not bigger than 1,5 h as plate
thickness is bigger than 150 mm, h is plate thicknes .
8.6.6 In bending strains with the height whose section is bigger 700 mm, side edges
need to lay longitudinal reinforcement which is constructed so that distance as
height between them is not bigger 400 mm and section area is not smaller
0,1%, concrete section area have dimension:
 as strain height: is distance among these reinforcement bars;
 as strain width: is ẵ width of beam or spandrel but not bigger 200 mm.
8.7 Cross reinforcement arrangement for strain

8.7.1 All strain faces which are laid longitudinal reinforcement, we need to arrange
confinement reinforcement surround outermost longitudinal reinforcement
bars. And distance between confinement reinforcement bars in every strain
face must not be bigger 600mm and twice of strain width.
Escentrical compressed strains with stretched longitudinal reinforcement laid
in the middle of section (ex: prestressed pile), possible not to lay confinement
reinforcement in case that concrete can suffer cross force assuredly.
In bending strain, width of thin spandrel edge (spandrel width is equal or
smaller 150mm) only have one longitudinal reinforcement bar or one welded
steel frame, this allows not to lay confinement reinforcement as width of that
spandrel edge
184
In escentrical compressed straight strains and in compressed area of bending

strain which is laid compressed longitudinal reinforcement as calculation,
confinement reinforcement must be arranged with the following distance:
 Structure is made from heavy concrete, fine concrete, light concrete,
hollow concrete:
+ Upon Rsc ≤ 400 MPa: not bigger than 500 mm and not bigger than:
15d to tied steel frame;

20d to welded steel frame;
+ Upon Rsc ≥ 450 MPa: not bigger than 400 mm and not bigger than:
12d to tied steel frame;

15d to welded steel frame;
– Strains made from cellular concrete which is laid welded steel frame: is not
bigger than 500mm and not bigger than 40d ( d – smallest diameter of
compressed longitudinal reinforcement, mm).
In this structure, confinement reinforcement must ensure to link tightly with
compressed reinforcement bars so that they are not plimmed as any directions
In non-welded superposed forced reinforcement positions, distance between
confinement reinforcement of escentrical compressed strain is not bigger than
10d.
If content compressed longitudinal reinforcement S ′ is higher 1,5%, and if
whole of strain section is compressed as well as the total content of
reinforcement S and S ′ is bigger 3%, distance between confinement
reinforcements are not bigger 10 d and 300 mm.
Requests of this part are not applied for longitudinal reinforcement which is
arranged as construction and whose diameter is not over 12mm and smaller
1/2 thickness of concrete cover .
8.7.2 In escentrical compressed strain, we must construct confinement
reinforcements within tied steel frame so that longitudinal reinforcement
(minium distance is 1 bar) is laid into bending position of confinement
185
reinforcement and these bending positions is far from each other not over
400mm according to section edge. If width of section edge is not bigger
400mm and there is no more 4 bars of longitudinal reinforcement on each
edge, we can use confinement reinforcement surround whole of longitudinal
reinforcement .
Upon constructing compressed strain by flat welded steel frame, we must link
flat welded steel frames into space frame by welding tangent mark of cross
reinforcement bars with longitudinal reinforcement bar in corner of frame.
Allowed to use cross reinforcement bars which have hook-bend to tie with
longitudinal bars at positions in which have cross bar within welded steel
frame
If there are a lot of longitudinal reinforcement in each of welded steel frame,
we need to use hook-bended cross reinforcement bars to tie intermediate
longitudinal reinforcement bars within adverse frames, one far-between
longitudinal reinforcement there is one which is tied like this way and
distance among tied reinforcement bars is not over 400m . Allowed not to lay
tied reinforcement bars if section edges is not over 500mm and number of
longitudinal reinforcement on that edge is not more 4 .
8.7.3 Escentrical compressed strains which is calculated indirect reinforcement
under welded mesh (made from reinforcement group CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII,
A-III with diameter is not bigger than 14 mm and type of Bp-I) or un-
stretched helical form or circle reinforcement need taken:
 Gridline dimension is not smaller 45 mm, but not bigger 1/4 of strain
section edge and not bigger than 100 mm;
 Screw-collar dimension or circle dimension is not smaller than 200 mm;
 Mesh-size is not smaller than 60 mm, but not bigger than 1/3 of smaller-
edge of strain section and not bigger than 150 mm;
 Helical-size or circle-size is not smaller than 40 mm, but not bigger than
1/5 of strain section dimension and not bigger than 100mm
 Steel mesh, circle or helical reinforcement need to surround all forced
longitudinal reinforcement bars;
186
 Upon reinforcing end segment of escentrical compressed strains by welded

wire net, we must arrange 4 or over 4 mesh on the segment which is not
smaller 20 d calculated from the strain end if longitudinal reinforcement
is plain-round bar and is not smaller than 10 d , if longitudinal
reinforcement is edged bar .
8.7.4 In escentrical compressed straight strains, confinement reinforcement
diameter within tied steel frame is not smaller 0,25 d and not smaller than 5
mm, with d – biggest longitudinal reinforcement diameter .
Confinement reinforcement diameter within tied steel frame of bending strain
need taken:
 not smaller 5 mm as strain section height is not bigger than 800 mm;
 not smaller 8 mm khi as strain section height is bigger than 800 mm.
Correlation between cross-reinforcement diameter and longitudinal
reinforcement diameter within welded steel frame and welded wire net is
defined as the current regulation of welding.
8.7.5 In structure of beam style whose height is bigger than 150mm as well as in
plate of many holes (or similar structure of may carcasses) whose height is
bigger than 300 mm, we must lay cross reinforcement.
In solid plate without depending on height, in holed panel (or similar structure
of may carcasses) with height which is not bigger than 300mm and in
structure of beam style whose height is smaller than 150mm, we are allowed
not to lay confinement reinforcement but must ensure calculation requests as
point 6.2.2.13.
8.7.6 In structure of beam style and plate style is indicated in point 8.7.5, cross
reinforcement is arranged as follows:
 near support area: a distance of 1/4 span as there is an even distributed
weight. And if there is concentrated force – it is a distance from support
to concentrated force which is the nearest to support. But if it is not
smaller than 1/4 span as strain section height h , cross reinforcement –
size is taken as follows:
≤ 450 mm: not bigger than h /2 and not biiger than 150 mm.
187
> 450 mm: not bigger than h /3 and not biiger than 500 mm.
– On the rest of span as strain section height is not biiger than 300 mm,
confinement reinforcement-size is not bigger than 3/4 h and not bigger than
500 mm.
8.7.7 Cross reinforcement is laid to suffer cutting force must be surely fixed at 2
ends by welding or binding longitudinal reinforcement in order to ensure that
the durability of linkage and confinement reinforcement is equivalent.
8.7.8 In compressed pierced area, cross reinforcement within plate is laid with
distance which is not bigger than h /3 and not bigger than 200 mm, the width
of area which is laid cross reinforcement is not smaller than 1,5 h (with h is
plate thickness). The anchor of these jreinforcement need to follow the
instructions at point 8.7.7.
8.7.9 Cross reinforcement of short cong-xon is laid as cross direction or is leaned at
a 45°. Cross reinforcement-size must not be bigger than h /4 and not bigger
than 150 mm ( h is cong-xon height).
8.7.10 In helical strain, tied confinement reinforcement is made into a closed circle
and surely fixed at 2 ends (segment which is linked together must be long
30 d ). Steel frame which welds cross-reinforcement bars as 2 directions need
to be welded into longitudinal reinforcement bars at corner in order to create a
closed circle and must ensure that the durability of linkage and confinement
reinforcement is equivalent
8.8 Connection of reinforcement weldability and availabel details

8.8.1 Plain and edged reinforcement made from hot-flattened steel and heat treated
steel group AT-IIIC and AT-IVC and normal fibre steel as well as available
detials within treatment process must use butt-welding or spot-welding to
connect reinforcement bars together or connect rolled-steel plates. We are
allowed to use automatical or semi-automatical or handed arc welding as the
instructions at point 8.8.5.
Abutment joint of cool-tensioned reinforcement of style A-IIIB must be
welded before cool-tension. Reinforcement bars made from hot-flattened steel
group CIV, A-IV (from steel 20CrMn2Zr), A-V and A-VII, reinforcing
188
reinforcement by thrust-heat such as AT-IIIC, AT-IVC, AT-IVK (from steel

10MnSi2 and 08Mn2Si), AT-V (from steel 20MnSi) and AT-VCK only used
welding forms as regulations of current standards.
Without being allowed to jointing weldability of hot-flattened steel group
CIV, A-IV (made from steel 80Si), reinforcing reinforcement by thrust-heat
group AT-IV, AT-IVK (made from steel 25Si2P), AT-V (except reinforment
made from steel 20MnSi), AT-VK, AT-VI, AT-VIK and AT-VII, fibre steel
with high intension and cable used for reinforcement .
8.8.2 As welding joint style and welding method of reinforcement bars, available
detials must be regulated including condition of structure usage, welding
property of steel, norm of economy – technology of connection and
technological capacity of manufacturer .
Cross joints by tangent spot-welding or arc tacked welding must ensure
reinforcement bars of mesh or welded steel frame which can suffer stress
without being smaller than its calculation intension (joints with standard
durability) need indicate in reinforcement proessing drawing clearly.
Cross joints with durability without calculation is used to locate
reinforcement bars within transportation process, pouring concrete or
constructing structure .
8.8.3 In workshop, as constructing kinds of mesh or welding steel frame or joining
reinforcement bars as the length, we must use tangent spot-welding method,
butt welding. Whilst construction of available details, we should use
automatical welding method, corner welding and tangent butt welding for
connected joint
8.8.4 Upon assembling reinforcement products and assemble reinforcement
concrete structure , the priority is semi-automatical welding method to ensure
capacity of joining quality control
8.8.5 If there is no neccesary welding equipment, we are allowed to perform (in
workshop and assembling condition), cross welding connection, butt welding,
superposed welding, corner welding to connect reinforcement and available
details as arc welding method including can be by hands as current standards
to weld reinforcement and available details. Without being allowed to use arc
189
tacked welding in cross joints which have forced reinforcement group CIII,
A-III (made from steel 35MnSi).
On using handed arc welding to carry out welding joints as durability
calculation. In mesh and welded steel frame, we must lay additional
construction accessories in joining position of longitudinal reinforcement bars
nad confinement reinforcement bars (canted plate, gusset plates, ….)
8.9 Superposed connection of stretched reinforcement

8.9.1 Non-stretched forced reinforcement superposed connection is used to
connect welded steel frame and mesh or to tie with connected bar diameter
which is bigger than 36mm .
We should not use superposed connection within tensioned area of bending
strain and escetrical tension at places where reinforcement is used the whole
of forced capacity
We should not use superposed connection within straight strains whose
tensioned section (ex. stretched bar of roof) as well as in every cases of using
reinforcement group CIV, A-IV up.
8.9.2 Upon connecting tensioned and comprssed reinforcement bars as well as
welded steel net and welded steel frame as operated directions, the length of
superposed connection segment l must not be smaller than value l an which is
defined as formula (189) and table 36.
8.9.3 Mesh connection or welded steel frame as well as tensioned reinforcement
bars of mesh and tied steel frame need arranged staggeredly. In which section
area of forced reinforcement is connected at 1 position or within a distance
which is smaller than superposed connection segment l , need to be not bigger
than 50% of total area of tensioned reinforcement to edged reinforcement and
no bigger than 25% to plain round reinforcement .
Connection of reinforcement bars and no staggered welded steel net is only
for construction reinforcement and places where reinforcement is used no
over 50%.
8.9.4 Welded steel mesh connection made from hot-flattened plain round
reinforcement group CI, A-I as forced direction need to carry out so that each
190
connected mesh is in tensioned area on the length of superposed connection

segment, has less 2 cross bars which is welded with all longitudinal bars (pic
26). We can use such a jointing style to superposed connection of welded
steel frame and to forced reinforcement bars which is located in one side and
made from any kinds of steel. Connection of welded steel net which is made
from steel CII, A-II, CIII, A-III as forced direction is carried out without cross
reinforcement in connecting segment of connected 1 or 2 mesh (pic 27)
a) d1
d
b) d1
d
d1
c)
d1
d
Pic 26 – Superposed connection (no weldability) as forced

direction of welded mesh made from plain round
reinforcement
a – as cross bar in flat surface ;
b, c – as cross bar in different flat surfaces
8.9.5 Welded steel mesh connection as non-forced direction is carried out by

superposed connection with superposed segment (calculated from middle of
outermost forced reinforcement bars of each mesh):
 Diameter of distributed bar (cross bars) is not bigger than
4 mm (pic 28a, b): ................................................................. 50 mm
 Diameter of distributed bar (cross bars) is bigger than
4 mm (pic 28a, b): ............................................................... 100 mm
191
If forced reinforcement diameter is not smaller than 16 mm, welded steel

meshes as non-forced direction allow to lay the butt and use dedicated steel net
to connect. These additional must cover reinforcement which is laid in each
side a segment without being smaller than 15 d and 100 mm (pic 28c).
a) d1
l
b) d
d1
l
d
Pic 27 – Superposed connection (no weldability) as forced

direction of welded mesh made from edged reinforcement
a – no cross bar within superposed segment in one of connected
meshes ;
b – no cross bar within superposed segment không có thanh ngang
trong đoạn nối ở cả hai lưới được nối.
a) 50÷100mm
d
d1
b) 50÷100mm
d1
d1
≥ 100mm; ≥ 15d1
c)
d1
d
d1
Pic 28 – Welded mesh connection as distributed reinforcement

direction
a – Superposed connection as forced reinforcement bars located on the
same plain surface ;
192
b – Superposed connection as forced reinforcement bars located in

different plain surface;
c – Connection to close packed connected meshes and to cover
additional meshes
Welded steel meshes as non-forced direction are allowed to lay juxtapose

without superposed connection and additional meshes in the following cases:
 Laying welded steel meshes as 2 perpendicular directions ;
 Having an additional construction reinforcement as stable direction in
connecting position
8.10 Joint structural unit of assembling construction
8.10.1 When joining structural unit in reinforced concrete of assembling construction,
inner force is transmitted from this component to other component through
joint of forced reinforcement, laid details, filler concrete in joint, wedge
concrete or (to compression unit) directly through surface concrete of jointed
unit.
Joint of pre-stressed force structural unit, as the same of assembling
construction, requested not permeate has to do concrete, using expanded
cement.
8.10.2. Rigid joints of assembling construction are mondithiced by filling concrete in
joint between structural units. If as manufacture assure to install exactly
between surfaces (Ex: when using tip of this unit as form to tip of another
unit) permit to use dry joint when only compressed force transmit to joints.
8.10.3 Joint of tension member need to carry out:
a. Steel welding laid details
b. Welding starter bar
c. Routing laid pipe or waiting gaping unit joined cables or bolts then drawing
extensively and filling a joint with mortar or small grain concrete.
d. Gluing structural unit by polymer mortar over joined details made of
reinforcement bar.
8.10.4 Laid details need anchoring to concrete thanks to anchor bar or welding forced
reinforcement of structural unit.
Laid details with anchor including plates (angle plate or gusset) are welded
angle or lap with anchor bars usually made from CII, AII steel and CIII, AIII
193
steel. The length anchor bars of laid details when bearing tensile force are not
less than lan according to 8.5.2 point.
The length of anchor bar may decrease if welding at the tip of anchor bar or
expanding tip of anchor with diameter which is not less than 2d for CI, A-I,
CII reinforcement groups, and not less than 3d-for CIII, A-III reinforcement
groups. In this case, the length of anchor bar determined by pulled out and
pressing locally concrete calculating is taken not less than l0d (d- diameter of
anchor bar, mm)
If tensile anchor arranged perpendicular with longitudinal axis of structural
unit can create cracks because basic inner force effects on structural unit, at that
time the tip of anchor bar needs consolidating by adding welded steel or
expanding the tip of anchor.
Laid details rolled from steel sheet are composed by led of anchor with surely
adhesive place (Ex: At sphere tip of anchor size) and function part as anchor
sheet (Ex: welding detail). Laid detail rolled from 4mm - 6mm thick of steel
are designed so as to discarded steel part when making leg of anchor is least
details need calculating to durability of leg of anchor and of sheet. Durability of
anchor details are examined by calculating locally pulled out and compressed
concrete.
The thickness of laid detail sheets is determined to the instruction at 6.2 and
6.3 point and according to the welding requirements.
8.10.5 At the tip node joined to eccentrically compressed unit (Ex: at the tip of
assembling column), need to put indirect reinforcement which is agreeable to
instructions at 8.7.3 point
8.11 Individually structural requirements:
8.11.1 Settlement joint need estimating in building house (construction) on dissimilar
grounds (settlement of foundation…) at suddenly changing loading capacity
position
If in this upper cases settlement joint wasn’t estimated previously, foundation
with enough durability and hardness makes sure to prevent the failure of
superstructure, or having special structure achieves the upper targets
Settlement joint liked expansion temperature joint in concrete frame and
continuously reinforced concrete need carrying out thoroughly, cut structure
deeply to supported footing. Expansion temperature joints in reinforced
concrete frame construction are done by using double pillars with middle joint
running to surface foundation.
The distance between settlement joints, expansion temperature joints in
concrete foundation and in basement wall are allowable to equaling the
distance between super-structural joints.
194
8.11.2 In concrete construction, need to estimate reinforcement texture

a. At suddenly changing section dimension of structural unit point
b. At changing height of wall (in approximate not less than 1m meter)
c. Poured concrete inner wall below and over opening in a wall every storey
d. In dynamic load construction
e. At the edge has less stress than eccentric compression member if the
maximum stress in section is determined as 0.8Rb exceeding elastic object, the
minimum stress is less than 1 MPa or in tension, while reinforcement ratio µ is
not less than 0.025%.
The requirements in this point don’t apply in structural unit of assembling
structure which is checked in handling or erecting period. In this case,
reinforcement is laid in accordance with durable calculation.
If calculation shows loss of durable member at the same time of the crack’s
appearance in tension concrete, the requirements in 4.2.10 point are
considered to structural units which are laid less reinforcement (not
considering to the working of tension concrete). If calculation is considered to
tension concrete, it isn’t necessary to lay reinforcement and it is proved
neither do in handling and erection by experience, it isn’t necessary to lay
structural reinforcement.
8.11.3. Location of installing steel is guaranteed right according to design due to
building methods (putting plastic supporters, gasket made of fine particle
concrete etc…).
8.11.4. Hole with big size in slab, panel etc… is needed to be surrounded by
supplemental steel with area not smaller than necessary area of force bearing
steel (in direction of putting supplemental steel) according to calculation as for
solid panel.
8.11.5. When designing parts of the pre-cast slab, it needs to pre-locate middle slots of
slabs and they are inserted by concrete. Width of slot is stipulated from
conditions of guaranteeing quality when inserting them and it is not smaller
than 20mm as for part with height not over than 250mm and it is not smaller
than 30mm as for part with bigger height.
8.11.6. In the part of the pre-cast structure, it is needed to have solution of lifting
them: assembling crane hook, hole of waiting steel pipes, fixed assembling
hook made of steel bar etc… Hook for lifting must be made of hot-rolled steel
in accordance with requirements in article 5.2.1.8.
8.12 Supplemental instruction about pre-stress reinforced concrete
195
8.12.1 In pre-stress parts, it needs to guarantee adhesion between steel and concrete
by using deformed steel bar, inserting pipes, slots with cement mortar or fine
particle concrete tightly.
8.12.2. Diagram and method to manufacture super-static pre-stress parts are selected
in such a way that it does not cause additional stresses in structure to decrease
working ability of structure when making previous stress. Allowing to
arrange joints or temporary supporter and it is poured concrete in place after
pulling tensile steel.
8.12.3. In semi-assembling reinforced-concrete structure, it is needed to guarantee

sticking of pre-stress parts with concrete poured at force-bearing locations of
structure as well as anchoring their ends together. In addition, simultaneous
working of parts in horizontal direction is also needed guarantee by suitable
methods (putting transverse or pre-stress steel of parts in horizontal
direction).
8.12.4. A part of longitudinal steel bar of parts does not need pre-stress if satisfying
calculating requirements about crack and deformity.
8.12.5. When strengthening partly at the area next to tensile steel anchor as well as at
locations of putting tensile equipment, it should arrange ready-put details or
supplement transverse steel as well as increase section dimension at these
parts.
8.12.6. If longitudinal steel is arranged at the top and bottom, at the end of part, it is
needed to put tensile or non-tensile transverse supplemental steel.
The tensile transverse steel must be pulled before pulling longitudinal steel at
the force that is not smaller than 15% of pulling force of whole longitudinal
steel at the tensile area of the supporter section.
The non-tensile transverse steel must be anchored firmly by welding ends to

ready-put details. Area of these steels in the structure is not calculated to
bear tiredness, it must bear 20% up of inner force in the tensile longitudinal
steel at the under area of the supporter section, as for the structure which is
calculated to bear tiredness, it must bear 30% up. Supporter section is
determined by calculation according to durability.
8.12.7. With fibred steel, it is arranged under form of fibre bundle, it needs to
calculate slots between each fibre or each group of fibre (by putting fibre steel
in the twisting form in the fibre bundle or putting short bars at the anchor,
etc…), it must have enough dimension for cement mortar through fibres in
the fibre bundle or small particle concrete filling cable-putting ditch closely.
196
8.12.8. Tensile steel (bar or cable) in the hollow hole part and parts with rib is needed
to arrange according to the axis of each rib of the part except to cases stated in
the article 8.6.5.
8.12.9. At the end of the pre-stress part, it needs to put supplemental steel rings or
indirect steel (welding steel grid surrounding all longitudinal steels, steel
rings etc… at the distance of 5cm to 10cm). On the length not shorter than 0.6
lp; as for parts made of light concrete from level B7.5 to B12.5 at the distance
of 5cm, it is in length not smaller than lp (see article 5.2.2.5) and not smaller
than 20cm for the part of using the non-anchor steel. When having anchor
structure, it is in the part which is twice as long as the length of anchor
structure. Putting the anchor at the end of steel is enforced to the steel pulled
on the concrete as well as the steel pulled on the platform; when not being
enough force for adhesion with concrete (fibred plain, many-fibred cable), the
anchoring equipment is needed to guarantee tight keeping of steel in the
concrete in all working stages of the steel.
When using the high-strength deformed steel, one-time twisted cable, the hot-
rolled deformed steel is heat-processed to make steel tensile on the platform,
it does not need to put the anchor at the ends of the tensile steel bars.
9. Calculation requirements and composition of reinforced concrete when big-

repairing the house and the work.
9.1. General principle:
9.1.1. This part stipulates design requirements of concrete structures and reinforced
concrete of the house and the work (previously strengthened or non-
strengthened) when having big repair.
This part stipulates principle of calculating the existing structure (calculating,

checking) as well as calculating and making structure parts which are needed to
be strengthened.
9.1.2. Calculating, checking the existing structures are needed to execute when having
change of acting load, space-organizing solution and use conditions as well as,
when detecting defects and damages in the structure with purpose of
determining force-bearing ability and meeting normal use conditions in new
working conditions.
9.1.3. Structure doesn’t meet requirements of calculation, it needs to strengthen.

When designing parts which must be strengthened, it is needed to originate
from requirements which don’t stop or stop manufacturing temporarily.
9.1.4. Calculating and checking the existing structures as well as calculating and
making the strengthening structures, it need to execute on the basic of design
197
documents, data about manufacture and building of these structures and the
surveying data of current state.
9.1.5. When not having damage and defects to decrease force-bearing ability of parts
as well as not having sag and expansion of crack that exceed allowable limit, it
allows to execute calculation and check on the basis of design documents
(geometric dimensions of structure section, (tensile) compressing-bearing
durable level of concrete, concrete grade according to (tensile) compressing-
bearing strength, group of steel, composition and structure scheme).
9.1.6. In the case, requirements about calculation according to design documents

don’t satisfy or when don’t having design documents as well as, when having
defects and damage to decrease force-bearing ability of structure, when having
sag or expansion of crack to exceed allowable limit, it is needed to execute to
calculate and check including survey data of current state of the structure.
9.1.7. Survey of current state is needed to state data about geometric size of section,
arrangement of steel in the structure part, concrete strength and steel type, sag
of structure and width of crack, defects and damage, load, static calculating
diagram of structure.
9.1.8. Structure strengthening only need considering in the cases when the current
structure does not satisfy requirements according to calculation, you check for
force-bearing ability or requirements of normal-using conditions. It does not
need to strengthen structure if:
- Actual sag of the structure exceeds allowable limit (see Article 4.2.11) but it
does not affect requirements of normal use and it does not change its structure
diagram.
- Structure has difference compared to requirements stated in part 5 but the
surveying process does not detect damage caused due to that difference
although structure has been used for a long time.
9.1.9. Calculation and composition of strengthened structures are needed to execute

on basis of survey data of current state stated in article 9.1.7.
9.2. Calculation, check

9.2.1. Calculation, check of concrete structure and reinforced concrete are needed to
execute according to requirements stated in items from 4 to 8 and in this part.
9.2.2. It does not need to calculate according to 2nd limit state if displacement and
width of crack in the current structure is smaller than allowable limit, internal
force in the part section generated due to new load does not exceed value of
internal force because actual load acts to structure.
198
9.2.3. When calculating, it is needed to check section of structures with defects and
damage as well as to check sections where, during surveying process, it detects
concrete areas with strength that is 20% up smaller than average strength.
Defects and damage are shown in calculation including decrease of concrete
section or steel. It also needs to mention influence of defects and damage to
characteristics of durability and deformity of concrete; to eccentric level of the
axial force; to adhesion of concrete and steel etc…
9.2.4. Calculating characteristics are determined according to part 5, it depends on

fixed compressing-bearing durable level of concrete in the current structure.
9.2.5. When calculating, checking according to data of design documents, in the case,
if design of current structure stipulating standard characteristics of concrete is
grade according to its strength, fixed compressing-bearing durable level of
concrete is taken as follows:
- As for heavy concrete, fine particle concrete, light concrete: Being taken
equal to 80% of the strength of standard cubic sample corresponding to grade
according to compressing-bearing strength.
- As for beehive concrete: Being taken equal to 70% of standard cubic sample
strength corresponding to grade according to compressing-bearing strength.
As for values of fixed compressing-bearing durable level of concrete different
from values stated in article 5.1.1.3, calculating strength of concrete is
determined by linear interpolation.
9.2.6. When calculated, checked based on the survey result of current state, value of
fixed compressing-bearing durable level of concrete is determined according to
article 9.2.5; but replacing concrete grade with actual strength values of
concrete according to structure group, individual structure or each its area,
collecting from survey result of current time according to methods of non-
destroying experiment or direct sample-testing methods from structure.
9.2.7. Depending on state of concrete, kind of structure and its working conditions as
well as depending on methods of determining concrete strength, when having
special basis, it can use other methods to determine concrete strength.
9.2.8. Calculation characteristics of steel are determined depending on the steel group
used in the structure of current reinforced concrete according to instruction in
part 2 including requirements stated in articles 9.2.9 and 9.2.10.
9.2.9. When executing to calculate, check current structures according to design

documents based on old standards, steel standard strength Rsn determined
according to part 5. At that time, standard strength of fibre steel in group B-I is
taken equal to 390 MPA.
Calculated tensile-bearing strength of steel Rs is determined according to formula:
199
R sn
Rs = γs
Of which, γs - Reliable factor of steel, taken as follows:
- When calculating according to states of first limit:
+ As for steel bar in group:
CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII, A-III:…………… 1,15
CIV, A-IV, A-V and A-VI: 1,25
+ As for fibred steel in group:
B-I, B-II, Bp-II, K-7, K-19…………. 1,25
Bp-k……………………………………………………… 1,15
- When calculating according to 2nd limit states: …………… 1,00
Calculating tensile-bearing strength of the transverse steel (steel ring and oblique steel
bars) Rxw is determined by multiplying the calculating strength value Rs collected by
working condition factor γsi (value γsi stated in part 5). Calculating compressing-
bearing strength of steel Rsc (except steel of group A-IIIB) is taken equal to the
calculating tensile-bearing strength of steel Rs but it is not bigger than values stated in
part 5. As for steel of group A-IIIB, the calculating compressing-bearing strength Rsc
is taken according to requirement of part 5.
In addition, it needs to mention supplemental working condition factors of steel
according to article 5.2.2.4.
Value of the calculating strength of steel is rounded to 3 digits.
9.2.10. When calculating, checking according to result of testing steel sample

collected from survey of current state, standard strength of steel is taken equal
to average value of actual yield point (or fixed yield limit) collected from test
of steel sample and then it is divided by factor:
- As for steel of group CI, A-I, CII, A-II, CIII, A-IIIa, CIV, A-IV:…. 1,1
-As for steel of other groups: ………………………………………….. 1,2
Calculating strength of steel needs taking according to requirements stated in
article 9.2.9.
9.2.11. It depends on quantity of test sample and state of steel, when having certain
basis, it can use other methods to determine the calculating strength of steel.
9.2.12. When not having design document and it cannot take test sample, it allows to
take the calculating tensile-bearing strength of steel Rs depending on type of
steel:
- As for plain round steel: Taking Rs = 155 Mpa
- As for deformed steel:
+ One side: Taking Rs = 245 MPa
+ Two sides: Taking Rs = 295 Mpa
200
At that time, value of the calculating strength of the compressing-bearing steel is

taken equal to Rs, the calculating strength of transverse steel Rsw is taken equal
to 0,8 Rs.
9.3. Calculation and composition of strengthened structure

9.3.1. Requirements of this part are used to design and calculate structure of
reinforced concrete strengthened by shaped hot-rolled steel, by concrete and by
reinforced concrete.
Parts of strengthened reinforced concrete are needed to design to satisfy requirements
stated in part 4 to part 8 in standard VN construction 338:2005 (When
strengthening by shaped hot-rolled steel) and regulations in this part.
9.3.3. Calculating the strengthened structure need to execute according to two stages:
a/ Before the working strengthened part: Calculating to bear load due to weight of
strengthened structure (only calculating according to first limit states).
b/ When the strengthened part works: Calculating to bear all loads of use (Calculating
according to both limit states).
Calculation according to the second limit state does not need to execute if loads
of use don’t increase, stiffness and anti-crack ability of structure satisfy
requirements of use conditions but it is strengthened due to reason of detecting
defects and damage.
9.3.4. As for heavy damaged structures (Destroying at least 50% of concrete section
or at least 50% of steel section), it is needed to calculate part of strengthened
structure to bear all acting loads (Not including work of structure which must
be strengthened).
9.3.5. Area of horizontal section of strengthened structure is determined based on its

actual decrease due to corrosion. High-strength fibre steel in calculation does
not include when being eroded to make trace or eroded inside as well as eroded
due to ion Cl-.
9.3.6. Standard strength and calculating strength of strengthened steel parts are taken
according to regulation in Vietnamese construction standard 38:2005.
Standard strength and calculating strength of concrete and steel of strengthened
reinforced concrete structures and strengthened parts are taken according to
instruction in part 2 and according to articles from 9.2.4 to 9.2.12.
9.3.7. When designing strengthened structures, about principle, it needs noting load in
the strengthening process, it must not exceed 65% of calculating load. When
being too complex or when not being able to decrease load to the required
level, it allows to execute strengthening in the state of bigger load-bearing
structure. At that time, calculating characteristics of concrete and strengthened
201
steel must multiply by work condition factor of concrete γbt1 = 0,9 and steel
γsr1 = 0,9.
In all cases, level of decreasing load for strengthened structure must be selected
according to condition of safe guarantee for process of executing the
strengthening work.
9.3.8. In the case, if when strengthening structure to become a super-static system, it

needs mentioning factors stated in article 4.2.6.
9.3.9. Pre-stress values σsp and σ’sp in the strengthened steel S and S’ are needed to
take according to articles 4.3.1 and 4.3.2.
In this case, the biggest pre-stress values of steel σsp and σ’sp are taken not to exceed
0,9 Rs,ser for steel bar and 0,7 Rs,ser for fibre steel.
The smallest pre-stress value in steel is taken not to be smaller than 0,49 Rs,ser.
9.3.10. When calculating strengthened parts by pre-stress steel bar, wastage of stress
needs to determining according to articles 4.3.3 and 4.3.4.
When determining wastage due to anchor deformity put near the tensile equipment, it
is needed to include deformity due to compressing of tensile platform. When
not having experiment data, taking value of that deformity equal to 4mm.
9.3.11. When being tensile, the factor of accurate level needs determining according
to article 4.3.5 by taking supplemental factor γsp, it depends on strengthened
characteristics of composition as follows:
- As for transverse supporting bars and pulling-bearing steel: ……… 0,85
- As for steel of ring and oblique pulling bar: ………………………………………
0,75
9.3.12. As for bending-bearing and eccentric-compressing parts, they are strengthened

by concrete and reinforced concrete, calculation is executed similarly to that
of solid section part with conditions of complying with requirements about
calculation and composition to guarantee simultaneous work between old
concrete and new concrete. At that time, damage that cannot be overcome and
defects of strengthened parts (eroding or breaking steel; eroding; dividing
layer and damaging concrete etc…) decrease force-bearing ability of those
parts, it is needed to mention in calculation similar to the calculation, check of
structure before strengthening.
9.3.13. When, in structures strengthened by concrete or reinforced concrete, there are

concrete and steel with differently durable level, calculating strength of
concrete value and steel is taken to calculate according to durability with their
calculating strength.
202
9.3.14. For reinforcement concrete parts strengthened by concrete, steel and

reinforced concrete, calculation needs executing according to durable
condition for section perpendicular to the axial axis of parts. As for oblique
section and space section (in case there is the acting twisting moment) as well
as calculation to bear partial effect of load (compressing, breaking
compressing, breaking snatching), it is according to requirements in part 6 and
it includes presence of concrete and steel types with different durable level in
the strengthened part.
9.3.15. It needs calculating strengthened reinforced concrete part by concrete, steel or

reinforced concrete according to condition of forming, expanding and closing
crack. According to deformed conditions to satisfy requirements in part 7 and
supplemental requirements in relation to deformity and stress in reinforced
concrete part before taking the strengthening part into work as well as in
relation to existence of concrete and steel with different durable level in the
strengthened part.
9.3.16. Calculation of reinforced concrete part strengthened by non-sticking pre-stress

steel is executed according to the first and second limit states in accordance
with requirements in part 7, part 8 and supplemental requirements according to
non-sticking requirements between concrete and steel.
9.3.17. The smallest size of the part section strengthened by concrete and reinforced
concrete is determined on basis of calculating to bear internal forces including
technology requirements and it must not be smaller than sizes according to
requirements in part 8 about arrangement of steel and thickness of concrete
layer.
9.3.18. Compressing-bearing durable level of strengthened concrete is taken equal to

concrete level of strengthened structure and it is not smaller than B15 as for
the above parts and B12.5 as for foundation.
9.3.19. In cases, when strengthening is predicted for executing after decreasing load
for strengthened structure, it is only allowed to put load again when
strengthened concrete is enough design strength.
9.3.20. When strengthening by concrete and cast-in-place reinforced concrete, it is

needed to have solutions (cleaning, making rough for strengthened structure
surface etc…) to guarantee strength of the connecting area (joint) and
simultaneous work between strengthened part and strengthened structure.
9.3.21. When partial strengthening is only according to length of damaged area, it is

needed to execute strengthening for adjacent undamaged part in length that is
not smaller than 500mm and:
203
- is not 5 times smaller than strengthened concrete layer

- Length of anchoring longitudinal steel strengthened;
- is not 2 times smaller than the bigger size of the strengthened part section (as
for structure in bar form).
9.3.22. It allows to execute strengthening of part which uses non-tensile steel while
this part bears load by welding strengthening steel to the current steel, if being
under effect of load in the strengthening period, it must guarantee durability of
the strengthened part section not including working of strengthened steel.
Welding link according to point is needed to arrange at the distance which is
not smaller than 20d along steel bar.
204
APPENDIX A
Concrete used for concrete and reinforced concrete structure
A.1. Formula of determining (pulling) compressing-bearing durable level of concrete:
Correlation between compressing-bearing durable level and instant compressing-
bearing strength of concrete is determined according to formula:
B = Bm(1-1.64v) (A.1)
Correlation between tensile-bearing durable level and instant tensile-bearing strength
of concrete is determined according to formula:
Bt = Bmt(1-1.64v) (A.2)
In the formulas (A.1) and (A.2):
Corresponding Bm , Bmt are statistical average values of instant tensile-bearing and
compressing-bearing strength, it is determined as follows:
n1B1 + n2 B2 +...+ nn Bn
Bm ( Bmt ) = n1 + n2 +...+ nn
(A.3)
Where: n1, n2 ,… ,nn : quantity of standard test samples with corresponding strength
when compressing (tensile) to be B1, B2, … ,Bn;
ν: Variable factor of standard test sample strength, it depends on qualification of

concrete-manufacturing technology: ν = 0,135 corresponding to the compressing-
bearing case, ν=0,165 corresponding to the tensile-bearing case.
A.2. Correlation between durable level of concrete and concrete grade according to
strength:
Table A.1: Correlation between compressing-bearing durable level
of concrete and concrete grade according to compressing-bearing strength
Compressing- Average Grade Compressing- Average Grade

bearing strength of according to bearing strength of according to
durable level standard test compressing- durable level standard test compressing-
sample, bearing sample, bearing
Mpa strength Mpa strength
B3,5 4,50 M50 B35 44,95 M450
B5 6,42 M75 B40 51,37 M500
B7,5 9,63 M100 B45 57,80 M600
B10 12,84 M150 B50 64,22 M700
B12,5 16,05 M150 B55 70,64 M700
B15 19,27 M200 B60 77,06 M800
B20 25,69 M250 B65 83,48 M900
B22,5 28,90 M300 B70 89,90 M900
B25 32,11 M350 B75 96,33 M1000
B27,5 35,32 M350 B80 102,75 M1000
B 30 38,53 M400
205
Table A2: Correlation between tensile-bearing durable level of concrete

and concrete grade according to tensile-bearing strength
Tensile-bearing durable Average strength of Grade according to tensile-

level standard test sample bearing strength
Mpa
Bt 0,4 0,55 -
Bt 0,8 1,10 K10
Bt 1,2 1,65 K15
Bt 1,6 2,19 K20
Bt 2,0 2,74 K25
Bt 2,4 3,29 K30
Bt 2,8 3,84 K35
Bt 3,2 4,39 K40
Bt 3,6 4,94 -
Bt 4,0 5,48 -
Legend: In table A.1 and A.2:
1.Value of concrete grade according to (tensile) compressing-bearing strength is
rounded to the nearest value but it has tendency about safety.
2. Values stated in tables are applied for heavy concrete, fine particle concrete, light
concrete, hollow concrete.
A.3 Correlation is between standard compressing-bearing strength of concrete Rbn

(cubic strength) and compressing-bearing durable level of concrete.
Correlation between standard compressing-bearing strength of concrete (cubic
strength) and compressing-bearing durable level of concrete is determined according
to the following formulas:
+ As for heavy concrete, fine particle concrete, light concrete and hollow concrete:
Rbn / B =(0,77-0,001B) (A.4)
But it is not smaller than 0,72.
+ As for beehive concrete:
Rbn/B = (0,95-0,005B) (A.5)
Value Rbn calculated according to formula (A.4) and (A.5) is given in table 12 of this
standard and it is rounded.
206
APPENDIX B
(For reference)
Some common usage steel and instruction usage
B.1 Classify steel according to melt limit of some kind of steel kind
Table B.1 – Some common usage steel
Yield Limit of
point endurance
MPa MPa
235 CI VN Standard (TCVN 235 380 min.
A-I 1651 : 1985) min.
Russia (GOST
5781-82*)
SR235 Japan (JIS G 3112 - 235 380 ÷ 520
1991) min.
250 BS 4449 :1997 250 287,5 min.
UK (BS 4449 : 1997)
gr.250 min.
AS 1302–250R 250 –
Australia (AS 1302- min.
AS 1302–250S 1991) 250 –
min.
295 SR295 Japan (JIS G 3112 - 295 380 ÷ 520
1991) min.
440 ÷ 600
Actual yield point
295 SD295A Japan (JIS G 3112 - 295

1991) min.
SD295B Japan (JIS G 3112 - 295 ÷ 440 ÷ 600
1991) 390
300 CII VN Standard (TCVN 300 500 min.
A-II 1651 : 1985) min.
Russia (GOST
5781-82*)
300 A615M gr. 300 US (ASTM 300 500 min.
A615M-96a) min.
335 RL335 China (GB 1499-91) 335 ÷ 510 min.
460
345 SD345 Japan (JIS G 3112 - 345 ÷ 490 min.
1991) 440
390 SD390 Japan (JIS G 3112 - 390 ÷ 560 min.
1991) 510
390 CIII VN Standard (TCVN 600 600 min.
A-III 1651 : 1985) min.
Russia (GOST
5781-82*)
207
400 AS 1302–400Y Australia (AS 1302- 400 –

1991) min.
420 A615M gr. 420 US (ASTM 420 620 min.
A615M-96a) min.
460 BS 4449 : 1997 483 min.
460
gr.460A UK (BS 4449 :
min.
BS 4449 :1997 1997) 497 min.
gr.460B
Japan (JIS G 3112 - 490 ÷
490 SD490 620 min.
1991) 625
520 A615M gr. 520 US (ASTM 520 690 min.
A615M-96a) min.
Russia (GOST 540
540 A-IIIB –
5781-82*) min.
540
540 RL540 China (GB 1499-91) 835 min.
min.
590 RL590 China (GB 1499-91) 590 885 min.
min.
590 CIV VN Standard (TCVN 590 900 min.
A-IV 1651 : 1985) min.
Russia (GOST
5781-82*)
208
Table B.2 – High-strength steel
Yield Limit of
point endurance
MPa MPa
785 SBPR 785/1030 Japan (JIS G 3109- 785 1030 min.
1994) min.
788 A-V Russia (GOST 788 1000 min.
5781-82*) min.
835 RE (RR) -1030 UK (BS 4486 835 1030 min.
:1980) min.
930 SBPR 930/1080 Japan (JIS G 3109 930 1080 min.
-1994) min.
930 SBPR 930/1180 Japan (JIS G 3109 930 1180 min.
-1994) min.
980 A-VI Russia (GOST 980 1250 min.
5781-82*) min.
1080 SBPR 1080/1230 Japan (JIS G 3109- 1080 1230 min.
1994) min.
1175 AT-VII Russia (GOST 1175 1400 min.
10884-94) min.
Fixed yield point
1300 wire - 1570 - 7 UK 1300 1570 min.

1390 wire - 1670 - 7 (BS 5896 :1980) min. 1670 min.
1390
min.
1390 wire - 1670 - 6 1390 1670 min.
1470 wire - 1770 – 6 min. 1770 min.
1470
min.
1390 wire - 1670 - 5 1390 1670 min.
1470 wire - 1770 – 5 min. 1770 min.
1470
min.
1350 wire - 1620 - 4.5 1350 1620 min.
min.
1390 wire - 1670 - 4 1390 1670 min.
1470 wire - 1770 - 4 min. 1770 min.
1470
min.
1200 3Bp1200 1200 1470 min.
Russia min.
1300 4Bp1300 (GOST 7348-81*) 1300 1570 min.
min.
209
1400 5Bp1400 1400 1670 min.

min.
1400 6Bp1400 1400 1670 min.
min.
1400 7Bp1400 1400 1670 min.
min.
1500 8Bp1500 1500 1780 min.
min.
1420 7-wire standard- UK 1420 1670 min.
1670-15.2 (BS 5896 :1980) min.
1500 7-wire standard- 1500 1770 min.
1770-12.5 min.
1490 7-wire standard - 1490 1770 min.
1770 -11 min.
1500 7-wire standard - 1500 1770 min.
1770 - 9.3 min.
1550 7-wire supe - 1550 1770 min.
1770 - 15.7 min.
1580 7-wire supe - 1580 1860 min.
1860 - 12.9 min.
1570 7-wire supe - 1570 1860 min.
1860 - 1.3 min.
1580 7-wire supe - 1580 1860 min.
1860 - 9.6 min.
1550 7-wire supe - 1550 1860 min.
1860 - 8.0 min.
1450 7-wire drawn - 1450 1700 min.
1700 - 8.0 min.
1550 7-wire drawn - 1550 1820 min.
1820 - 5.2 min.
1560 7-wire drawn - 1560 1860 min.
1860 - 2.7 min.
1400 K7-1400 1400 1670 min.
Russia (GOST min.
1500 K7-1500 13840-81) 1500 1770 min.
min.
1500 K19-1500 Russia (TU 14–4–22- 1500 1770 min.
71) min.
210
B.2 Converse equivalent steel method

B.2.1 When using different steel from steel in VN standard (or GOST of Russia), you
have to base on correlative standard of this steel according to the using steel in
construction requirements. At that time, you need to know clearly mainly
technical standard in 5.2.1.1 (chemical composition and manufacture method
meet the requirement of steel used in construction. Target in intensity: melt
limitation, durable limitation, variable coefficient of these limitations, flexible
module, the maximum of stretch length, plasticity, weldable ability, changing
mechanical property as decreasing and increasing temperature to bearing high
or low temperature structure, fatiguing limitation to repetitively bearing load
structure…). Besides, you have to know the shape of section: round or
vermiculated round (ribbed round), steel or cable.
To be able to converse steel to equivalent steel, kinds of steel are classified to 2
groups: clearly real melting limitation and not clearly real melting limitation.
For steel having clearly real melting limitation is based on limited melting
convention
B.2.2 When using different steel from steel in VN standard (or GOST of Russia), you have to
base on real melting limitation (or limited melting convention) to converse closely equivalent
steel but leaning to safety
B.3 Apply in calculating coefficients
B.3.1 When applying calculating coefficients for different steel from steel in VN standard (or
GOST of Russia), you need to follow the instructions for each calculating coefficients:
B.3.1.1 Believable coefficients of reinforcement γs:
*When calculating to first limited state:
- For steel having melting limitation and this value is not over 300 MPa: γs= 1,1
- For steel having limited melting convention and this value is over 600 MPa: γs= 1,2
- For steel having melting limitation and this value is between 300 MPa and 600 MPa: γs is
taken as linear interpolate between 1,1 and 1,2
*When calculating to second limited state: γs= 1,0
B.3.1.2 Working condition coefficients γsi:
When calculating to first limited state:
a. Coefficients γsi is mentioned as structure is born load repetitively. Don’t apply γs3
given in Table 24 for different reinforcement from this in this table. In case using
different reinforcement, you have to know their fatigable limitation.
b. Coefficients γs4 is mentioned as structure is born load repetitively and has united
welding reinforcement.
211
c/ Factor γs6 is mentioned when high-strength steel (with fixed yield point)
works in higher condition than fixed yield point (See 6.2.2.4): To determine γs6 in
formula (27), factor η is taken as follows:
+ As for kinds of cable steel: η = 1,15
+ As for kinds of bar steel with standard tensile-bearing strength equal to 590 Mpa:
η=1,20
+ As for kinds of bar steel with standard tensile-bearing strength equal to 800 Mpa:
η=1,15
+ As for kinds of bar steel with standard tensile-bearing strength more than 1000
Mpa: η=1,10
+ As for kinds of bar steel with standard tensile-bearing strength over η, it is taken
according to the linear interpolation.
When welding joint is located in the part area with bending moment exceeding
0,9Mmax (Mmax is the biggest calculating moment), value of factor γs6 for steel with
fixed yield point smaller than 800Mpa is taken equal to 1,1 down. As for steel with
fixed yield point bigger than 1000 Mpa, it is taken not to be bigger than 1,05; if value
of yield limit is between 800 Mpa and 1000 Mpa, it is taken not to bigger than value η
according to linear interpolation of corresponding values of the fixed yield point.
d/ Factor γs7 is taken equal to 0,8 for steel in plain round kind used as transverse steel
for parts made of light concrete in level B7,5 and lower (see Table 15);
When calculating according to second limit state:
When calculating according to limit states of 2nd group Rs,ser, the calculating strength
of steel is taken into calculation with working condition factor γsi = 1,0.
B.3.1.3. Value σsR
In the formula (25), value σsR is determined depending on steel kind (with yield point
or fixed yield point and kind of steel in cable form):
+ As for kinds of steel with yield point (bar steel and normal fibred steel) σsR = Rs-σsp.
+ As for kinds of steel with fixed yield point: σsR = Rs + 400 - σsp - Δσsp (With kinds
of fibred steel and cable, it is taken equal to Δσsp = 0).
When using both tensile steel and non-tensile steel, σsR is determined according to
tensile steel. When using tensile steel with different tensile strength, it is allowable to
take the biggest value σsR in those values of tensile strength.
B.3.1.4. Value Δσspi and β in article 6.2.2.19:
When making pre-stress for kinds of bar steel with fixed yield point by mechanical
methods as well as automatic thermoelectric methods or automatic thermoelectric
mechanical methods:
σ spi
Δσ spi = 1500 Rsi − 1200 ≥ 0
σ spi
β = 0,5 Rsi + 0,4 ≥ 0,8
212
When making pre-stress for kinds of bar steel with fixed yield point by other methods
as well as making pre-stress for fibred steel and cable with fixed yield point by any
method, value Δσspi is taken equal to 0 and factor β = 0,8
B.3.1.5. Value ηr:

In the formula (45), ηr is taken as follows:
+ As for steel with actual yield point: ηr = 1,0
+ As for steel with fixed yield point (Including bar steel, fibre steel, cable): ηr = 1,1.
B.3.1.6. Factor η and θ in formula (55):

Factor η is taken equal to 25 for high-strength bar steel with fixed yield limit.
Value θ is taken not to be smaller than 1,0 and it is not bigger than 1,6..
B.3.1.7. Value σsc,u

In the formula (57), as for kind of steel with fixed yield point higher than 800 Mpa,
σsc,u is taken not to be more than 1200 Mpa, when fixed yield point is smaller than
800 Mpa, σsc,u is taken not to be more than 900 Mpa.
B.3.1.8. Factors ϕb2, ϕb3 and ϕb4:

In article 6.2.2.3.: When calculating structure with use of longitudinal steel with fixed
yield point, factors ϕb2, ϕb3 as well as ϕb4 (article 6.2.3.4) must multiply by factor 0,8.
B.4. Requirement of composition:

B.4.1. Thickness of protection concrete layer
B.4.1.1. In article 8.3.4: Thickness of protection concrete layer at the ends of pre-
stress parts along length of stress-transmitting part (see article 5.2.2.5) is needed to
take not to be smaller than:
As for bar steel (high strength) with fixed yield point: ….….3d
As for steel in cable form: ………… 2d
(Here, d is calculated in mm).
In addition, thickness of protection concrete layer of the above-mentioned area
is needed not to be smaller than 40mm for all kinds of bar steel and not to be smaller
than 30mm for steel in cable form.
B.4.1.2. In article 8.6.2: In bending-bearing parts made of light concrete which use
steel equivalent to CIV, A-IV and lower, diameter of longitudinal steel must not
exceed:
As for concrete with compressing-bearing durable level from B12,5 down: ……….
16mm
As for concrete with compressing-bearing durable level from B15, B25: …………….
25mm
As for concrete with compressing-bearing durable level from B30 up:
………………… 32mm
213
As for steel with higher group, limit diameter of steel bar must be in accordance with
current corresponding regulations.
B.5. Regulation on steel welding:

When welding steel, it must comply with requirements about steel welding according
to standards corresponding to each kind of steel selected: model of welding, welding
method.
B.6. Regulations about steel connection:

It must comply with requirements of part 8 in this standard.
APPENDIX C
Sag and displacement of structure
C.1. Scope of application:
C.1.1. This part stipulates limit values about sag and displacement of force-bearing
and surrounding structure of the house and the work when calculating according to 2nd
limit states.
C.1.2. Regulations in this part don’t apply to the water work, traffic work, atomic
electric plant as well as pole of the electric wire, outdoor distribution equipment and
Antenna of the communication information works.
C.2. Common instruction:

C.2.1. When calculating construction structure according to sag (curve level) or
displacement, it needs to satisfy condition:
f ≤ fu (C.1)
Where:
f: Sag (curve level) or displacement of structure parts (or whole structure) is
determined including elements affecting their value as stated in items C.7.1. to C.7.3.;
fu: Sag (curve level) or limit displacement is stipulated in this part.
Calculation needing executing is originated from:

a/ Requirements about technology (Guarantee conditions of normal use of technologic
equipment, lifting equipment, measuring and checking tools etc…).
b/ Requirements about composition (Guarantee intact state of adjacent structures and
their joints, guaranteeing stipulated oblique level);
c/ Requirements about psychology (preventing harmful impact and trouble feeling
when structure is fluctuated);
d/ Requirements about art and psychology (guaranteeing good impression about
outside shape of structure except dangerous feeling).
When calculating, each above requirement is satisfied separately without
mutual dependence.
Restrictions about vibration of structure are needed to stipulate according to
requirements stated in item C.7.4.
214
C.2.2. As for calculating situation, it is needed to determine sag, displacement and

loads corresponding to them as well as requirements in relation to initial curve level
stated in item C.7.5.
C.2.3. Limit sag of floor and roof structure parts is stipulated according to
requirements about technology, composition and psychology which needs calculating
from bending axis of parts corresponding to state at the time point of putting load to
cause the needed sag. As for requirements about art and psychology, it is calculated
from line to connect supporters of composition (see item C.7.7).
C.2.4. Sag of structure parts according to requirement of art and psychology is not
limited if they are not seen or make ugly for outside shape of structure (Ex: Structure
has the lifting or hanging lower bar, thin roof, oblique canopy). Sag according to
above-mentioned requirements does not also need to restrict for floor and roof
structure on the rooms with many people who travel in the short time (such as
transformer station and garret).
Note: As for all forms of roof floor, intact state of roof is needed to guarantee
according to stipulation by measures of composition (Ex: Using compensation
structure or making roof structures to work according to continuous scheme).
C.2.5. Reliable factor about load for all loads and dynamic factor for load of truck,
electric truck, bridge crane is taken equal to 1.
C.2.6. As for structure details of the house and the work which their sag and
displacement are not mentioned in this standard and other standards, sag in vertical
direction and horizontal direction caused by regular load, long-term load and short-
term temporary load must not exceed 1/150 of span or 1/75 of console length.
C.3. Limit sag according to vertical direction of parts:

C.3.1. Sag according to vertical direction of parts and corresponding load used to
determine that sag is stated in table C.1. Requirements for slot between parts are
stated in article C.7.6.
Table C.1: Limit sag in vertical direction fu and corresponding load

to determine sag in vertical direction f
Part of structure According to Limit sag according Load to determine

requirements about to vertical direction sag according to
fu vertical direction f
1. Gantry beam and
hanging crane
controlled:
- From under floor, Technology l/250 Due to one gantry
215
including Palang
- From cabin Psychology and
corresponding to technology
working regime:
Group 1K - 6K l/400 As above
Group 7K l/500 As above
Group 8K l/600 As above
Table C.1 – Limitation of sagging following to vertical direction f u and load

equivalent to determine sagging followimg to tvertical direction f (cont.)
Requirements Limitation of Load capacity to
according to sagging determine sagging
Structural Member following to according to vertical
vertical direction direction f
fu
2.Beam, pergda, joist, plate, Frequently, long term
purlin, Table (including the temporary
edge of plate and Table):
a. Roof and floor can be visible Aesthetics -
clear span l: Psychology
l ≤1m l /120
l =3 m l /150
l =6m l /200
l = 24(12) m l /250
l ≥ 36(24) m l /300
b. Garret floor and floor Texture Take following Decrease gaping between
between storeys having shelf C.7.6 forced structural part and
below. partition.
c. Garret floor and floor Texture l /150 Effect after finishing
between storeys when they partition, floor surface
have splited details (bracing, layer and cross bar
floor surface layer, partition)
d. Roof floor and floor between
storeys when having tackle,
hanging jib crane controlled by:
+ Floor Technology Minimum Temporary load including
between l /300 load which is caused hoist
and a /150 tower or tackle on railway
+ Cab Psychology Minimum Load is caused by hoist
between l /400 tower or tackle on railway
and a /200
216
e. Floor is effected by: Psychology l /350 Take the disadvantage

– Shifting, material, element and value between:
and detail plant and variable Technology + 70% all standard
rolling load (including under temporary load
load roll on substructure + load of an arranging
without rail load vehicle
– load move on rail:
+ Narrow size l /400
+ Large size l /500
Table C.1 – Limitation of sagging following to vertical direction f u and load

equivalent to determine sagging followimg to tvertical direction f (Finish)
Requirements Limitation of Load capacity to
according to sagging determine sagging
Structural member following to according to vertical
vertical direction direction f
fu
3. Ladder element (landing Aesthetics - According to 2a section
slab, intermidiate landing, Psychology
landing, stringer) balcony,
logia
Physiological Determine as C.3.4 point requirement
psychology
4. Sagging of floor slabs, Physiological 0,7 mm Concentraded load 1 kN
landing slab, intermidiate psychology at middle span.
landing, landing don’t
obstruct next member
5. Lintel, wall on window Texture l /200 Decrease gaping
and door (joist and purlin of between load bearing
large glazed area in a wall) member and infill of
windows, door below
structure
Aesthetics - As 2a Section
Psychology
Symbols in this Table:

l – calculation span of structure.
a – beam pitch or pergola join with way of hoist
Notes: 1) For cantilever l is taken as twice as unsupported length of cantilever
2) For intermediary value of l in 2a section, critical sagging is determined by linear
interpolate including requirements in C.7.7 point.
3) In 2a section number in brackets is taken when height of the room reaches 6m.
4) Characteristic sagging calculation following 2d section is mentioned in C.7.8 point.
217
5) When taking limitation of sagging in according to Aesthetics – Psychology, it is

permitted to take length of span l as equally as the distance among inner load bearing
wall (or column).
C.3.2 The distance (of clearance) from tip of lorry-mounted crane to the end point of
deflected stressed construction of roof (or its fasteners) don’t take less than 100mm.
C.3.3 To structural roof, it is necessary to assure their deflected calculation, the slope
of roof is not less than l/200 in one of direction (except all cases are mentioned in
other standards).
C.3.4 The deflective limitation in according to member of floor (beam, joist, plate),
staircase, balcony, logia, rooms in house and public building, offices in workshop
psychophysiological requirements are determined by formula: (C.2)
g ( p + p l + q)
fu =
30 n 2 (bp + p l + q )
g: gravity acceleration
p: standard value of load with vibration is caused by dead weight, taken the
same in C.2 Table
pt: decreased standard value of floor load, taken in Table 3, Việt Nam
construction Standard 2737:1995 and C.2 Table
q: standard value of load which is caused by calculated weight of structural
unit and butting structures on them
n: loading frequency when people walk back and forth
b: coefficient, taken in Table 2
Sagging needs determining following to total loads ψ Al + pl + q
2
with: ψ Al = 0,4 + 0,6 A A1 A : load area, A1 = 9m
Table C.2 – Coefficient, b
Kind of room p pl n b
(followed Table 3, VN Standard
2737:1995) kPa kPa Hz
Point 1, 2, except living room and 0,25 Taken Table 3 in 1,5 125 Q
α pal
classroom VN Standard
Point 3, 4a, 9b, 10b 2737:1995
Point 2: classroom and living room
Point 4b, c, except dancing room 0,5 As above 1,5 125 Q
α pal
Point 9a, 10a, 12, 13
Point 4, dancing room 1,5 0,2 2,0 50
Point 6, 7
Notes:
Q – body weight taken as 0,8 kN.
α – coefficient taken as 1,0 for calculated structure in beam scheme, taken as 0,6 for
218
left structures (Ex: slab spanning in two direction)

a – beam,j oist pitch, the width of plate, m.
l – calculation span of structure
C.4 Limitation of sagging follows to horizontal direction and brake structures because
of bridge crane load.
C.4.1 Sagging following to horizontal direction of house pillar with bridge crane,
viaduct, as well as beam bridge crane and brake member (beam and pergola) are
taken to Table C.3 but not less than 6mm.
Sagging need checking at the height of top face rail bridge crane to brake force
of which bride crane effects to the direction cutting short routing bridge crane, not
including of cant of foundation.
C.4.2 Different displacement on horizontal limitation of routing bridge crane, outside
viaduct caused by horizontal and vertical load of bridge crane (not including of cant
of foundation) is 20mm according to technology requirements.
Table C.3 – Limitation of sagging follows to horizontal direction f u column
of a house having bridge crane, viaduct, bridge crane girder and brake
structure
Group working Limitation of sagging f u of:
of bridge crane Column Bridge crane girder and brake structure,
House and Indoor house and the way to get the bridge
outside viaduct (including outdoor and indoor)
viaduct
1K–3K h /500 h /1500 h /500
4K–6K h /1000 h /2000 h /1000
7K–8K h /2000 h /2500 h /2000
Notes
h – the height from top face foundation to top of railway bridge crane (to single
storey building and indoor or outdoor the way to get the bridge) or the distance
between floor joist axis and top of railway bridge crane (to upper floor of tier
building)
L – calculation span of structure (beam).
C.5 Lateral displacement and sagging skeleton construction, individual structure and
support conveyor due to wind load, cant of foundation and temperature and climate
effects
C.5.1 Lateral displacement limitation of skeleton construction is taken to
compositional requirements (assuring whole dunnage of frame such as wall, partition,
detail door and window) is given in Table C.4, the instruction about displacement
determination is given in C.7.9 point
C.5.2 Lateral displacement of skeleton construction needs determining including of
cant (rotation) of foundation. In there, load caused by equipment weight, woodwork,
people, containing material is included when all loads are piled equally in floor of
storey (decreasing is up to the number of levels), except to anticipatable project case
which is different load according to normal usage condition.
219
The cant of foundation is determined including load wind, taken approximately 30%
standard value.
C.5.3 Lateral displacement of construction without skeleton because of wind load
wouldn’t need limitation if wall and partition and connected details was calculated to
durability and affordable cracking.
C.5.4 Lateral displacement horizontal limitation according to composition of pillar
and sheeting rail, as well as hanging wall panel due to wind load is needed taking as
l/200, in there l is pillar or panel length.
C.5.5 Lateral displacement horizontal limitation according to technology requirements
of support conveyor due to wind load is taken as h/250, in there h is height from face
foundation to soffit of beam or pergola
Table C.4 – Limiting displacement to horizontal direction f u according to
structural requirements
Connecting between Limiting
House, wall and partition wall and partition in displacement f u
single-plan frame
1.Tier building Any h 500
2. One floor of tier building Soft hs /300
a) Wall, brick partition, gypsum Hard hs /500
concrete, reinforcement concrete
panel
b) Natural stone veneer wall, made of Hard hs /700
ceramic block or large glazed area in
a wall.
3. Single-storey building (with h ≤ 6 hs /150
loaded itself wall) height of h =15 hs /200
the storey hs , m Soft
h ≥ 30 hs /300
Symbols:
h – tier building height, taken as the distance from face foundation to axis of joist
bear garret floor.
hs – storey height in single-storey building, taken as distance of face foundation to
soffit rafter. In tier building: to first floor, - taken as distance from face foundation to
axis of joist bear garret floor; to entire floor, taken as the distance between axis of
joist each storey.
Notes:
1) To intermediate value hs (following 3 section) limiting lateral displacement need
determining as linear interpolate.
2) To the highest upstairs in tier building, which is designed to use structural garret
floor of single-storey, horizontal displacement needing taking as single-storey. In
this case, the height of the highest floor hs is taken from floor beam axis to soffit
rafter.
220
3) Soft joints include the joint of wall or partition and frame, not prevent frame’s
movement (no transmission into wall and inner bearing partition which causes
damage structural details). Hard joints include preventable mutual movements of
frame of wall or partition
4) To a single floor having hanging wall ( as well as lacking hard pad of garret floor)
and floors of storey, limited horizontal displacement is permited to increase by 30%
(but not more than hs /150).
C.5.6 Lateral displacement horizontal limitation according to pillar of skeleton
construction due to temperature, climate and settlement effects is taken as:
- h/150 when wall and partition are as brick, gypsum concrete, reinforcement concrete
or assembling panel.
- h/200 when wall is veneered natural rock, made from Ceramic blocks or large
glazed area in the wall, in there h is storey height, for single-storey building
with bridge crane, h is the height from face foundation to soffit of bridge crane
beam
At this time, the effect of temperature needs taking not including a change of
temperature air day and night and disparity of temperature due to sun radiation.
When determined sagging to horizontal direction due to temperature, climate
and settlement effect, its value needn’t adding to sagging due to wind load and
cant of foundation.
C.6 Curvature member of floor structure is between storeys because of pre-
compression force.
C.6.1 Limitation curvature fu of floor structure between storey on according to
composition is taken as 15mm when l ≤ 3m and as 40mm when l ≤ 12m (for
intermediary value l, limitation curvature is determined as linear interpolation)
C.6.2 Curvature f needs determining due to pre-compression force, dead weight of
floor structure and floor paving layer weight.
C.7 Determination sagging and replacement methods:
C.7.1 When determining sagging and replacement need to mention all basic elements
which affect its value (non-elastic deformation of material, crack shaping,
mentionable deformation diagram, close structure, soft plug and substructure).
When having enough foundation, it is able not need calculating some certain
elements or calculating as approximative method.
C.7.2 Structure using creep material need to mention sagging increase by time. When
restricting sagging in according to psychophysiology, only counting short term
creep which appear as putting load following technology and composition
requirements (except as calculation mentions wind load), aesthetic and
psychology, calculate total creep.
C.7.3 When determining sagging pillar of single storey and viaduct due to horizontal
load bridge crane, it need to choose calculative diagram of pillar inclusive of
connecting condition with supposition:
- Pillar and leading bridge in house haven’t horizontal movement at the highest
bearing support level (if garret floor is not created hard piece in horizontal plane, need
to mention horizontal soft of this bearing support)
221
- Column in outside leading bridge is as cantilever

C.7.4 As in house and construction have technology and transportable equipments,
cause vibration to construction structure as well as other vibrations, limitation
value of vibratile replacement, vibratile velocity, vibratile acceleration need to
take to vibratile requirements at working place and at place in concerned
standard. When having highly accurate equipments and device, sensitive to
vibration of structure which they are put up, limitation value of vibratile
replacement, vibratile velocity, vibratile acceleration need to determine with
specific technology conditions
C.7.5 Calculative circumstances in there need to determine sagging, replacement and
correlative loads, have to choose depending on whether calculation
requirements are done.
If calculation is done following to technology requirements, calculative
circumstances need correlative with load effect, influence on working technology
device.
If calculation is done following to composition requirements, calculative
circumstances need correlative with load effect which cause failure of close structures
due to great curvature and replacement
If calculation is done following to psychology, calculative circumstances need
correlative with state concerned to vibratile structure. When designed, it needs
to mention load influence on vibration satisfying C.7.4 point and this standard
requirements.
If calculation is done following to psychology and aesthetic requirements,
calculative circumstances need correlative with long term and frequent load
effect.
For roof framing and floor designed with primary camber, when limiting
sagging to psychology and aesthetic requirements, sagging to vertical direction
is determined decreasingly by primary camber.
Notes:
Calculative circumstances: Gathering condition to determine calculative
requirements for structure, mentioned in calculation
Calculative circumstances is specified by calculative diagram of structure, kind
of load, value of working coefficient conditions and believable coefficient,
number of limitative states are examined in that calculative situation.
C.7.6 Sagging of floor structure and roof framing is limited to composition
requirements, not over the distance (gaping) between the soffit of this structure
and top face of glass partition, window frame, door below bearing member.
The gaping between the soffit of roof framing, floors between the storey and
the top face of the partition below these structures, is not over 40mm. In cases
which is done request above that have to increase hardness of floor and roof, it
must prevent to increase that hardness by composition method (Example:
Don’t put partition below flexible beam, but put beside this)
C.7.7 In case between partitions having bearing partition (in practical it is as high as
wall), l in 2a section Table C.1 need taking as the distance between inside
222
bearing walls (or pillar) and partitions (or between inside partition as Picture
C.1)
C.7.8 Sagging of rafter structure as having rail of hoist tower (Table C.1, 2d section)
needs taking as subtract sagging f1 and f2 of next rafter structure (Picture C.2).
C.7.9 Replacement to horizontal direction of frame need determining in plane of wall
and partition, of which intactness is assured.
When in connecting framed systems of storey has over 40m height, the slope in
level contacting to diaphragm, is taken as f1/hs + f2/l (Picture C.3), not over
(table C.4):
- l/300 to section 2
- l/500 to 2a section
- l/700 to 2b section
a) 4 3 5
6
1
l1 2 l2 1
b) 4 5 3
6 6
l1 2 l2 2 l3 1
1
Picture 1: Diagram determine value of l , l1 , l2 , l3 , when having

partition between bearing walls
a) one partition; b) two partition; 1 – bearing wall (or pillar); 2 –
partition; 3 – floor between storey (or garret floor) before loaded; 4 –
floor between storey (or garret floor) when bearing loaded ; 5 – mark
straight line to calculate sagging ; 6 – gaping
223
4
f2 f1 f2
1 1
2 1 1
1
a a 3 a a
Picture C2 – Diagram to calculate sagging of soffit rafter when having railway of

hoist tower
1 – soffit rafter; 2 – railway of hoist tower beam; 3 – hoist tower; 4 – first position of
rafter structure ; f1 – sagging structure because of the most loaded rafter ; f2 – sagging
structure because of rafter near structure which is because of the most loaded rafter
1 f1
2
f2
hs
l
Picture C3 – Diagram deviation of piece 2 belongs to
storey, contiguous with diaphragm 1 in sway bracing
building (thin line shows primary diagram of previous
frame when loaded)
224
Appendix D
Working group of bridge crane and hoist tower
Structure Working Conditional usages
group
– Manually operation (all kinds) 1K–3K – Any
– With hanging transmission – Use in repair, loaded
tackle having hang clip . conversion with limiting
– Bridge crane with carry winch intension.
load vehicle having hang clip. – Using in mechanical room in
hydroelectric station, for
assembling and loaded
conversion with limiting
intension.
– Bridge crane with carry winch 4K–6K – Use in loaded conversion with
load vehicle having hang clip. average intension; for
technology working in
mechanical plant, for finished
products storage in building
– Bridge crane with double material plant, for consuming
cable clam sheel, Bridge crane metal products storage.
with magnetic sheel – Mixture storage, using for
– Magnetic jib crane variable load affair
– In semi-manufactured storage,
it works with variable load.
– Jib crane use for forging, 7K – In iron mill workshop, material
tempering, casting storage pile up, homogeneous
– Bridge crane with double scrap iron (working 1 or 2 shifts)
cable clam sheel, Bridge crane – Technology bridge crane
with magnetic sheel works over day and night
– Bridge crane with carry winch
load vehicle have hang clip.
– Horizontal bridge crane, 8K – In iron mill workshop
trough clam sheel, trough – In workshop and storage of
material inlet, bridge crane is iron mill, metal storage is big
used for unload cast steel, with homogeneous products.
bridge crane is used for smash, – Material storage is equated and
blast-furnace bridge crane – homogeneous scrap iron
Magnetic bridge crane (working over day and night)
– Bridge crane with double
cable clam sheel, bridge crane
with magnetic sheel
225
Appendix E
Quantities are used for durability calculation
Table E.1 – Coefficient ξ , ζ , α m
ξ ζ αm ξ ζ αm ξ ζ αm
0,01 0,995 0,010 0,26 0,870 0,226 0,51 0,745 0,380
0,02 0,990 0,020 0,27 0,865 0,234 0,52 0,740 0,385
0,03 0,985 0,030 0,28 0,860 0,241 0,53 0,735 0,390
0,04 0,980 0,039 0,29 0,855 0,243 0,54 0,730 0,394
0,05 0,975 0,049 0,30 0,850 0.255 0,55 0,725 0,399
0,06 0,970 0,058 0,31 0,845 0,262 0,56 0,720 0,403
0,07 0,965 0,068 0,32 0,840 0,269 0,57 0,715 0,407
0,08 0,960 0,077 0,33 0,835 0,276 0,58 0,710 0,412
0,09 0,955 0,086 0,34 0,830 0,282 0,59 0,705 0,416
0,10 0,950 0,095 0,35 0,825 0,289 0,60 0,700 0,420
0,11 0,945 0,104 0,36 0,820 0,295 0,62 0,690 0,428
0,12 0,940 0,113 0,37 0,815 0,302 0,64 0,680 0,435
0,13 0,935 0,122 0,38 0,810 0,308 0,66 0,670 0,442
0,14 0,930 0,130 0,39 0,805 0,314 0,68 0,660 0,449
0,15 0,925 0,139 0,40 0,800 0,320 0,70 0,650 0,455
0,16 0,920 0,147 0,41 0,795 0,326 0,72 0,640 0,461
0,17 0,915 0,156 0,42 0,790 0,332 0,74 0,630 0,466
0,18 0,910 0,164 0,43 0,785 0,338 0,76 0,620 0,471
0,19 0,905 0,172 0,44 0,780 0,343 0,78 0,610 0,476
0,20 0,900 0,180 0,45 0,775 0,349 0,80 0,600 0,480
0,21 0,895 0,188 0,46 0,770 0,354 0,85 0,575 0,489
0,22 0,890 0,196 0,47 0,765 0,360 0,90 0,550 0,495
0,23 0,885 0,204 0,48 0,760 0,365 0,95 0,525 0,499
0,24 0,880 0,211 0,49 0,755 0,370 1,00 0,500 0,500
0,25 0,875 0,219 0,50 0,750 0,375 — — —
226
Table E.2 – Value ω , ξ R , α R for structure made from heavy concrete

Working Compressed durable rate of concrete
condition Tension
Symb
coefficient reinforceme
ols B12,5 B15 B20 B25 B30 B35 B40 B45 B50 B55 B60
of concrete nt group
γb2
0,9 Any ω 0,796 0,789 0,767 0,746 0,728 0,710 0,692 0,670 0,652 0,634 0,612
CIII, A-III ξ R 0,662 0,654 0,628 0,604 0,583 0,564 0,544 0,521 0,503 0,484 0,463
(∅ 10–40)
vµ Bp-I (∅ α R 0,443 0,440 0,431 0,421 0,413 0,405 0,396 0,385 0,376 0,367 0,356
4; 5)
CII, A-II ξR 0,689 0,681 0,656 0,632 0,612 0,592 0,573 0,550 0,531 0,512 0,491
αR 0,452 0,449 0,441 0,432 0,425 0,417 0,409 0,399 0,390 0,381 0,370
CI, A-I ξR 0,708 0,700 0,675 0,651 0,631 0,612 0,593 0,570 0,551 0,532 0,511
αR 0,457 0,455 0,447 0,439 0,432 0,425 0,417 0,407 0,399 0,391 0,380
1,0 Any ω 0,790 0,782 0,758 0,734 0,714 0,694 0,674 0,650 0,630 0,610 0,586
CIII, A-III ξ R 0,628 0,619 0,590 0,563 0,541 0,519 0,498 0,473 0,453 0,434 0,411
(∅ 10–40)
and Bp-I (∅ α R 0,431 0,427 0,416 0,405 0,395 0,384 0,374 0,361 0,351 0,340 0,326
4,5)
CII, A-II ξR 0,660 0,650 0,623 0,595 0,573 0,552 0,530 0,505 0,485 0,465 0,442
αR 0,442 0,439 0,429 0,418 0,409 0,399 0,390 0,378 0,367 0,357 0,344
CI, A-I ξR 0,682 0,673 0,645 0,618 0,596 0,575 0,553 0,528 0,508 0,488 0,464
αR 0,449 0,446 0,437 0,427 0,419 0,410 0,400 0,389 0,379 0,369 0,356
1,1 Any ω 0,784 0,775 0,749 0,722 0,700 0,808 0,810 0,630 0,608 0,586 0,560
CIII, A-III ξ R 0,621 0,611 0,580 0,550 0,526 0,650 0,652 0,453 0,432 0,411 0,386
227
(∅ 10–40)
vµ Bp-I (∅ α R 0,428 0,424 0,412 0,399 0,388 0,439 0,440 0,351 0,339 0,326 0,312
4,5)
CII, A-II ξR 0,653 0,642 0,612 0,582 0,558 0,681 0,683 0,485 0,463 0,442 0,416
αR 0,440 0,436 0,425 0,413 0,402 0,449 0,450 0,367 0,356 0,344 0,330
CI, A-I ξR 0,675 0,665 0,635 0,605 0,582 0,703 0,705 0,508 0,486 0,464 0,438
αR 0,447 0,444 0,433 0,422 0,412 0,456 0,456 0,379 0,368 0,356 0,342
ω
ω = 0,85 − 0,008 Rb ; ξ R = ; α R = ξ R (1 − 0,5 ξ R ).
Rs ⎛ ω⎞
1+ ⎜1 − ⎟
σ sc,u ⎝ 1,1 ⎠
Note: Value ω , ξ R and α R in this Table not including γ bi coefficient in Table 14.
228
Appendix F
Coefficient β to calculate sagging of simple beam
Calculation diagram β Calculation diagram β
q q
1 5
l 4 l 48
F F
1 1
l 3 l/2 l/2 12
F F F
a⎛ a⎞ 1 a2
⎜3 − ⎟ −
a 6l ⎝ l⎠ a a 8 6l 2
l l
229
Appendix G
Table convert old technology units to SI units
Old SI unit system
Quantity technology Convertibility relation
units Name Symbol
Newton
1 kG = 9,81 N ≈ 10 N
Kilogram N
kG 1 kN = 1 000 N
Force Newton kN
T () 1 T = 9,81 kN ≈ 10 kN
Mega MN
Newton 1 MN = 1 000 000 N
Newton
metre
kGm Nm 1 kGm = 9,81 Nm ≈ 10 Nm
Moment Kilogram
Tm kNm 1 Tm = 9,81 kNm ≈ 10 kNm
Newton
metre
1 Pa = 1 N/m2 ≈ 0,1 kG/m2
1 kPa = 1 000 Pa = 1 000 N/m2 = 100
kG/m2
Stress 1 MPa = 1 000 000 Pa = 1000kPa ≈ 100
Intension kG/mm2 Newton/mm N/mm 000 kG/m2 =10 kG/cm2
2 2
Modulus kG/cm2 Pascal Pa 1 MPa = 1 N/mm2

of T/m2 Mega Pascal MPa 1 kG/mm2 = 9,81 N/mm2
elasticity 1 kG/cm2 = 9,81 × 104 N/m2 ≈ 0,1MN/m2
= 0,1 MPa
1 kG/ m2 = 9,81 N/m2 = 9,81 Pa ≈ 10
N/m2 =1daN/m2
230
Table of content
(For reference) Some common usage steel and instruction usage ........................................................ 207
Appendix D Working group of bridge crane and hoist tower .................................................................... 225
Appendix E Quantities are used for durability calculation......................................................................... 226
Appendix F Coefficient β to calculate sagging of simple beam................................................................ 229
Appendix G Table convert old technology units to SI units ...................................................................... 230
231

TCXDVN 356-2005 Design of Concrete and RC Structures PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

TCXDVN 356-2005 Design of Concrete and RC Structures PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

TCXDVN 356: 2005

1.1 This standard shall replace the standard TCVN 5574:1991.

3 Terminology, measurement unit and symbols

3.2 Measurement unit

3.3 Symbols and parameters

3.3.1 Geometric features

x compressive concrete segment height;

As , As' symmetrical is the section area of non-stretch reinforcement S and stretch

Abt the section area of the strain concrete segment;

Ared converted section area of structure component, defined as in subarticle

Ib0 inertia moment of section having compressive concrete segment with

3.3.2 Features of reinforcement position in cross section of structure component

3.3.3 Exterior and interior forces

3.3.4 Material features

Rs , Rs,ser calculated strain strength of reinforcement symmetrical with primary and

3.3.5 Features of front stress structure components

4.1 Basic principles

4.2 Basic requirements about calculation

Table 1 – Anti-crack level and limited width value of the crack,

Anti-crack level and limited width value of

The load used in calculating reinforced concrete structures on condition of formation,

Table 2 – Anti-crack level of reinforced concrete structures and limited crack

Anti-crack level and values acrc1 and acrc 2 , mm

Bar steel group Bar steel group Bar steel group

2. Outdoor or inside Level 3 Level 3 Level 2

3. Inside the land Level 3 Level 2 Level 2

Table 3 – Load and reliability co-efficient of load γ f

Anti-crack Load and reliability co-efficient γ f when calculating in conditions

Regular load; long-term Regular load; Regular load;

 1/600 component length or distance between its sections connected to prevent

Table 4 – Limited deflection of common components

4.3 Supplementary requirements when designing front stress reinforced concrete

where: p measure by MPa, defined by:

 mechanical strain method: p = 0,05 σ sp ;

′ 2 shall be calculated by the

P , e 0p – defined by formulas (8) and (9), where values σ sp and σ sp

primary stress waste;

Table 6 – Stress waste

Factors causing stress Stress waste value, MPa

b) for bar steel 0,1σ sp − 20 –

here: σ sp , MPa, taken with no

Table 6 – Ttress waste (continued)

Factors causing stress Stress waste value, MPa

3. Deformation of Δl Δl1 + Δl2

Table 6 – stress waste (continued)

Factors causing stress Stress waste value, MPa

Table 6 – stress waste (continued)

Factors leading to the Stress waste value, Mpa

Table 6 – stress waste (continued)

Factors leading to the Stress waste value, MPa

Factors causing a loss of Value of stress loss, MPa

With: t – unit of time is day, defined as follow:

Table 7 – The coefficients to define loss of stress by a friction of strand

Coefficients to define loss of stress by frictional strand (see

4.3.5 When define value of pre-stress of the strand, it is multiplied by a coefficient of

n p – quantiry of the tension bars in component’s section.

Figure 1 – Drawing of the pre-compressive force in the

In the case of curviform tension strand, values σ sp and σ sp

Method for the tension Ratio σ bp Rbp is not more

1. Stress with reduction On the platform (Pre-

5 The material used for concrete structure and ferro-concrete

5.1 The concrete

Classification Sort of concrete Level or mark